Kingdom of Saudi Arabia The National Commission for...
Transcript of Kingdom of Saudi Arabia The National Commission for...
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic
Accreditation & Assessment
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
1
Contents:
Study plan / Curriculum.............................................................................................
4
Course specification
Zoo 103...................................................................................................................... 9
Zoo 212...................................................................................................................... 18
Zoo 242…………………………………………………………………………….. 27
Zoo 245……………………………………………….………………….………… 35
Zoo 262……………………………………………………………………………... 43
Zoo 305……………………………………………………………………………... 51
Zoo 311………………………………………………...…………………………… 59
Zoo 317……………………………………………………………………….…….. 68
Zoo 320……………………………………………………..………………………. 76
Zoo 325...…………………………………………………………………………… 84
Zoo 326………………………………………………………………………….….. 93
Zoo 327……………………………………………………………………………... 102
Zoo 332………………………………………………………………………...…… 110
Zoo 342……………………………………………………………………………... 118
Zoo 352……………………………………………………………..………………. 126
Zoo 355……………………………………………………………..………………. 134
Zoo 366……………………………………………………………..………………. 142
Zoo 373……………………………………………………………..………………. 150
Zoo 374……………………………………………………………..………………. 158
Zoo 375……………………………………………………………..………………. 166
Zoo 381……………………………………………………………..………………. 174
Zoo 382……………………………………………………………..………………. 182
Zoo 412……………………………………………………………..………………. 190
Zoo 413……………………………………………………………..………………. 198
Zoo 420……………………………………………………………..………………. 206
Zoo 423……………………………………………………………..………………. 214
Zoo 424……………………………………………………………..………………. 223
Zoo 425……………………………………………………………..………………. 231
Zoo 432……………………………………………………………..………………. 239
Zoo 433……………………………………………………………..………………. 247
Zoo 434……………………………………………………………..………………. 256
Zoo 435……………………………………………………………..………………. 265
Zoo 436……………………………………………………………..………………. 273
Zoo 441……………………………………………………………..………………. 281
Zoo 455……………………………………………………………..………………. 289
Zoo 456……………………………………………………………..………………. 297
2
Zoo 457……………………………………………………………..………………. 305
Zoo 458……………………………………………………………..………………. 313
Zoo 461……………………………………………………………..………………. 321
Zoo 462……………………………………………………………..………………. 329
Zoo 464……………………………………………………………..………………. 338
Zoo 465……………………………………………………………..………………. 346
Zoo 466……………………………………………………………..………………. 354
Zoo 471……………………………………………………………..………………. 361
Zoo 480……………………………………………………………..………………. 369
Zoo 481……………………………………………………………..………………. 377
Zoo 482……………………………………………………………..………………. 385
Zoo 498……………………………………………………………..………………. 393
3
1.1 The student must achieve (136) credit units as illustrated in the following table of
the study plan:
Requirement Courses no. Credit hours
Preparatory Year 8 31
University Requirements 4 8
Required assisting externally courses 7 19
Specialized required courses 28 66
Internal elected courses 20 12
External elected courses 16
Total 83 136
1.2 Undergraduate Zoology Degree Requirements:
1.2.1 Preparatory Year (31) Units
Course code Course name Prerequisite Credit hours
ENG 140 English (1) None 8
ENG 150 English (2) None 8
MAT 140 Mathematics (1)
(Introduction) None 2
MAT 150 Mathematics (2) (Calculus) Mat 140 3
CT 140 Computer skills None 3
CI 140 Research, thinking and
learning skills None 3
CHS 140 Health & Fitness None 2
MC 150 Communication skills None 2
4
1.2.2 University Requirements ( 8 ) Units.
The student must study 4 courses from the following:
Course code Course name Prerequisite Credit hours
IC 101 Introduction to Islamic
culture None 2 ( 2+0 )
IC 102 Islam and building up the
society None 2 ( 2+0 )
IC 103 Economic system in Islam None 2 ( 2+0 )
IC 104 Political system in Islam None 2 ( 2+0 )
IC 105 Human Rights in Islam None 2 ( 2+0 )
IC 106 Human Rights International
and Natives Policies None 2 ( 2+0 )
1.2.3 Required assisting externally courses (19 Units)
Course code Course name Prerequisite Credit hours
Stat 106 Biostatistics (E) None 2 ( 1+1 )
Phys 205 Biophysics (E) None 2 ( 2+0 )
Chem 103 General chemistry (E) None 3 ( 3+0 )
Bch 101 General Biochemistry (E) None 4 ( 3+1 )
Geo 105 Geology (E) None 2 ( 2+0 )
Bot 102 General botany (E) None 3 ( 2+1 )
Mic 140 Microbiology (E) None 3 (2+1 )
(E): Courses given in English
5
1.2.4 Specialized required courses (66) units
Course code Course name Prerequisite Credit hours
Zoo 103 Principles of general Zoology
(E) None 3 ( 2+1 )
Zoo 212 Parasitology Zoo 103 3 ( 2+1 )
Zoo 242 Cell biology & Physiology (E) Zoo 103 3 ( 2+1 )
Zoo 245 Histology Zoo 242 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 262 Microtechniques Zoo 103 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 305 Animal modern Taxonomy Zoo 103 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 311 General Entomology Zoo 103 3 ( 2+1 )
Zoo 317 Medical arthropods (E) Zoo 311 3 ( 2+1 )
Zoo 320 Ichthyology Zoo 103 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 325 Ornithology Zoo 103 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 326 Mammology Zoo 103 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 327 Herpetology Zoo 103 3 ( 2+1 )
Zoo 332 General physiology (E) Zoo 103 3 ( 2+1 )
Zoo 342 Molecular biology (E) Zoo 242 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 352 Principles of genetics (E) Zoo 342 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 373 Terrestrial ecology Zoo 103 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 374 Aquatic ecology Zoo 103 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 375 Pollution Zoo 103 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 420 Comparative Vertebrate
anatomy (E) Zoo 103 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 423 Principles of descriptive
embryology Zoo 103 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 424 Principles of Experimental
embryology (E) Zoo 423 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 425 Economic Fishes and
Crustaceans Zoo 320 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 432 Endocrinology (E) Zoo 332 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 433 Immunology (E) Zoo 332 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 461 Laboratories technology (E) Zoo 262 2 ( 0+2 )
Zoo 465 Field studies 34 units 5 ( 0+5 )
Zoo 471 Animal behavior Zoo 103 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 498 Graduation Research project
(E) 2 ( 0+2 )
() Finishing at least 95 credit hours.
12/28 (42.9%) (E): Courses given in English
6
1.2.5 Two options are available for students in Zoology Department, A; for
students who would like to continue their career in Zoology, B; for
students who would like to teach Biology at the high school level.
(A) Elective courses from Zoology (12) Units:
Course code Course name Prerequisite Credit hours
Zoo 355 Animal wildlife Genetics Zoo 352 2 ( 2+0 )
Zoo 366 Management of fish culture Zoo 320 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 381 Economics of Aquaculture Zoo 320 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 382 Entomofauna of Saudi
Arabia Zoo 311 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 412 Parasite Immunology Zoo 212 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 413 Entomology and
Environmental Health Zoo 311 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 434 Renal physiology Zoo 332 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 435 Neurophysiology Zoo 332 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 436 Reproductive physiology Zoo 332 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 441 Histochemistry Zoo 245
Zoo 262 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 455 Genetic engineering Zoo 342
Zoo 352 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 456 Bioinformatics Zoo 342 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 457 Cytogenetics and cell culture Zoo 342
Zoo 352 3 ( 2+1 )
Zoo 458 Human genetics Zoo 342
Zoo 352 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 462 Experimental parasitology Zoo 212 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 464 Biotechnology Zoo 424 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 466 Industrial environmental
pollution Zoo 375 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 480 Wildlife protection Zoo 373 2 ( 2+0 )
Zoo 481 Venomous animals Zoo 327 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 482 Organic adaptations of
Chordates Zoo 103 2 ( 1+1 )
Total 41
7
(B) Elective courses from Botany and Microbiology Department (12)
Units:
Course code Course name Prerequisite Credit hours
Bot 212 Plant Anatomy Bot 102 4 ( 2+2 )
Bot 222 Principles of Flowering Plants
Taxonomy Bot 102 3 ( 2+1 )
Bot 231 Economic botany Bot 102 2 ( 2+0 )
Bot 241 Plant ecological factors Bot 102 3 ( 2+1 )
Bot 263 Archegonate Bot 102 2 ( 1+1 )
Bot 345 Flora of Saudi Arabia Bot 102 2 ( 1+1)
Bot 384 Phycology Bot 102
Or Mic 140 3 ( 2+1 )
Bot 442 Hot desert ecology Bot 102 1 ( 1+0 )
Bot 444 Ecological resources Bot 102 2 ( 1+1 )
Bot 486 Phytoplanktone Bot 102 2 ( 1+1 )
Bot 488 Lichens Mic 140 2 ( 1+1 )
Mic 250 Virology Mic 140 3 ( 2+1 )
Mic 260 General Bacteriology Mic 140 3 ( 2+1 )
Mic 270 General Mycology Mic 140 3 ( 2+1 )
Mic 340 Microbial ecology Mic 140 3 ( 2+1 )
Mic 344 Sanitation and water
microbiology Mic 140 2 ( 1+1 )
Total 42
8
1.2.6 Applied courses: The following listed courses are to fulfil student’s
duties in various agencies for professional demands.
Course code Course name Prerequisite Credit hours
Zoo 212 Parasitology Zoo 103 3 ( 2+1 )
Zoo 262 Microtechniques Zoo 103 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 317 Medical arthropods Zoo 311 3 ( 2+1 )
Zoo 373 Terrestrial ecology Zoo 103 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 374 Aquatic ecology Zoo 103 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 375 Pollution Zoo 103 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 355 Animal wildlife Genetics Zoo 352 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 366 Management of fish culture Zoo 320 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 381 Economics of Aquaculture Zoo 320 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 382 Entomofauna of Saudi
Arabia Zoo 311 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 413 Entomology and
Environmental Health Zoo 311 2 ( 1+1 )
Zoo 466 Industrial environmental
pollution Zoo 375 2 ( 1+1 )
Total 26
9
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 103: Principles of General Zoology
Zoology Department
College of Scienc
King Saud University
2009
10
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: General Zoology (Zoo 103)
2. Credit hours 3.0 (2 + 1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4- Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Ashraf M. Ahmed
5- Level/year at which this course is offered
Third level
6- Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
None
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
11
B Objectives:
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
Types and chemical structure of organic molecules (carbohydrates,
proteins, lipids and nucleic acids (DNA & RNA).
Structure of animal cell (basic cytology).
Cell division.
Structure, function and types of animal tissues (basic histology)
Systematic study of animal Kingdom (Basic taxonomy):
o Sub-kingdom: Protozoa (different examples of animals)
o Sub-kingdom: Parazoa (different examples of animals)
o Sub-kingdom: Metazoa (different examples of animals)
Anatomical study of mouse as an experimental animal (examples of the
different body systems and their organs.
Principals of animal Physiology (Nutrition, digestion and metabolism,
blood (structure and function)).
Principals of animal Ecology.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental course planning committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments,
slides and new preparations.
Updating course resources using new information available in the internet.
Comparison of course topics with equivalent local and international
universities.
12
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contact
hours
Organic molecules 1 2
Structure of animal cell 1.5 3
Cell division 1 2
Structure, function and types of animal tissues 1 2
Principals of animal physiology 2 4
Basics of the systematic study of animal Kingdom 4 8
Dissection of mouse (examples of body systems) 1 2
Principals of animal Ecology 0.5 1
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 24 Tutorial: 1 Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 12
Other:
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
60h
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned
13
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Recognize types and chemical structure of organic molecules.
Describe properties and structure of animal cell.
Describe cell division.
Recall and differentiate between different animal tissues.
Identify animals systematically in the Animal Kingdom.
Investigate experimental animals.
Indicate different organs of different systems.
Get acquainted with the basics of the animal Ecology.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In class lecturing (using PowerPoint and illustrations)
Laboratory practice and microscope examination (Conducting
experiments and writing reports)
Activities and homework.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Mid-term and final exams
Assessment of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and homework.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Examining and describing cells and cell organelles under the microscope.
Distinguishing animal cells in different division stage of cell.
Recognizing animal tissues under the microscope.
Distinguishing taxonomically between different animals.
Dissecting experimental animals.
Dissecting body systems in mice.
Using computers and internet.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of microscopic illustrations.
Laboratory training
Activities and homework.
14
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Students response during the class
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and homework.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific project.
Ability to conduct a specific project with minimal supervision.
Communicating results of work to others.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Work independently.
Work as part of a team.
Communicate results of work to others.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Evaluation of group projects.
Assessment of projects conducted individually.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific project.
Finding ways to solve problems.
Acquiring skills to use computers and internet.
Training to conduct searches and restore information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit activities, assignments and writing reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the laboratory written reports
Results of activities and assignments
15
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assess-ment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
First lab exam 6 15%
2
Second lab Exam 12 15%
3
First theoretical exam 6 15%
4
second theoretical exam 14 15%
5
Final Exam 17 40%
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
16
E Learning Resources
1. Required Text(s)
2. Campbell, N. A. and Reece, J. B. (2002). Biology (6th
edition). Pearson
Education. Inc. USA.
3. Brooker, R. J., Widmaier, E. P., Graham, L. E. and Stiling, P. D. (2008).
Biology. McGraw-Hill International Edition.
2. Essential References
1- Campbell, N. A. and Reece, J. B. (2002). Biology (6th
edition). Pearson
Education. Inc. USA.
2- Brooker, R. J., Widmaier, E. P., Graham, L. E. and Stiling, P. D. (2008).
Biology. McGraw-Hill International Edition.
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
3- Campbell, N. A. and Reece, J. B. (2002). Biology (6th
edition). Pearson
Education. Inc. USA.
4- Brooker, R. J., Widmaier, E. P., Graham, L. E. and Stiling, P. D. (2008).
Biology. McGraw-Hill International Edition.
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package and Josoor Program
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Optically and electronically facilitated lecture rooms (smart rooms).
Microscopically equipped laboratories.
2. Computing resources
17
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questioners for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental studying plan
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Installation of modern microscopes and digital labs
Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
18
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 212: Parasitology
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
19
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Parasitology, Zoo 212
2. Credit hours 3.0
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Saleh A. Al Quraishy
5. Level/year at which this course is offered Level 4
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Zoo 103
8. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
8. Location if not on main campus
20
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
General concept of Parasitology
Knowledge of some parasitic disease that could be transmitted between
animals and man (Zoonotic diseases).
Knowledge how to protect man and domestic animals from parasites and their
treatment.
Basic knowledge of parasitism, the different biological inter-relationships and
the host parasite relationships.
Knowledge of different parasitic examples from all phyla (Protozoa &
Metazoa), their biology, life cycles, diagnosis, treatment & control.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
The block course begins by description of the subject bases by the lecturer,
then the practical in which each student will prepare his own specimen from
the materials offered for each parasite studied. Moreover, a scientific film will
be shown.
On the other hand, an electronic preparation of all items of the course on the
website.
Annual updating of the course contents with new information using internet
materials.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
An introduction to Parasitology, biological relationship,
types of parasitism.
1 3
General knowledge of parasites from the different
phyla, geographical distribution – Bases of
classification – general characters – development of the
most recent classification of the different examples.
1 3
21
1- Subkingdom Protozoa
Phylum Sarcomastigophora
Apicomplexa
Ciliophora
Myxozoa
Microspora
Different methods and techniques applied for
identification of parasitic infection
6 18
2- Subkingdom Metazoa
An Introduction to Helminths and their characters
Phylum Monogenea
Digenea
Acanthocephala
Nematoda
Phylum Arthropoda
Insects
Ticks & Mites
6 18
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 28 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 28
Other:
-
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average :for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
45
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
22
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Identify parasitism, parasites and their examples
Describe parasitic diseases and modes of diagnosis
Trace control of parasitic infections.
Understand host-parasite relationships.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using PowerPoint and illustrations)
Laboratory practice and microscopic examination.
Conducting experiments and writing reports.
Activities and assignments.
Visits to hospitals and diagnostic laboratories.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Written exams (Major and final exams)
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Righte use of microscopes.
Identification and description of parasites.
Preparation and examination of fresh materials.
Preparation of permanent slides.
Preparation of reagents and solutions to diagnose parasites.
Using computers and internet.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of labelled drawings and illustrations.
Practical training.
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Major and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
23
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific project.
Conducting a specific project with minimal supervision.
Communicating results of work to others.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Work independently.
Work as part of a team.
Communicate results of work to others.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of group projects.
Evaluation of projects conducted individually.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific project.
Identify ways to solve problems.
Acquiring skills to computers and internet.
Ability to conduct searches and restore information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit activities, homework and writing reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the laboratory written reports
Results of activities and assignments
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
24
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( activities and homework) 3-6-8 10%
2
Monthly Exam. 9 10%
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours at least 6 hr/ week
E. Learning Resources
4. Required Text(s)
- Schmidt, Roberts “Foundations of Parasitology
2. Essential References
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
Mehlhorn H. (2008): Encyclopaedia of parasitology.
- Chiodini et al. (2001): Atlas of medical helminthology and ProtoZoology.
-Roberts et al. (2004): Foundation of parasitology.
25
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft Office Package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Modern lecture rooms using data show.
Equipped laboratories.
5. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Light microscopes – Microscopical preparations of different parasites – Glass
wares – Chemical materials.
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questioners for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental course committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the department.
4 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Installation of modern microscopes and digital labs
Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
26
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
27
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 242: Cell biology & Physiology
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
28
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Cell biology & Physiology (Zoo 242)
2. Credit hours 3 (2 + 1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Bachelor degree in Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Dr. Abdulaziz A. Al- Saleh and Dr. Saleh El Wasel
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Fourth level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
General Zoology (Zoo 103)
9. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
29
B. Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
1- To be able to know the emergence of modern cell biology and the concept of
prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells.
2- To enable students with basic knowledge of the biological membrane and their
structure and function. This includes transport across membranes, signal
transduction and protein targeting.
3- To enable students with basic knowledge of structure and function of cell
organelles and cytoskeleton system.
4. To enable students to learn basic knowledge about the cell cycle, apoptosis and
stem cells.
5. To be able to know the mechanism of glycolysis, Krebs cycle and oxidative
phosphorylation.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are
being implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material,
changes in content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental course planning committee.
Updating the course with the latest developments in the field and using
internet materials.
Updating practical sessions with new experiments and slides.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contact
hours
The emergence of modern cell biology 1 1
Prokaryotic and Eukaryotic cells 1 1
Biological membranes 2 4
Transports across membranes 2 4
Cell signal transduction and protein targeting. 1 2
Cell Organelles (Structure and Function)and cytoskeleton 3 6
The cell cycle, apoptosis and stem cells. 2 4
Glycolysis, Krebs cycle and oxidative phosphorylation. 2 4
30
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture:
14
Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork/Interns
hip:
28
Other: -
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
40
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
1- To be able to know the emergence of modern cell biology and the concept of
prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells.
2- To enable students with basic knowledge of the biological membrane and their
structure and function. This includes transport across membranes, signal
transduction and protein targeting.
3- To enable students with basic knowledge of structure and function.
4. Learn basic knowledge about the cell cycle, apoptosis and stem cells.
5. Define mechanism of cellular respiration.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
Lectures are given using PowerPoint and handouts
Using light and electron microscope to examine slides.
Reports and Oral presentations.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Written exams
31
Practical exam.
Discussion
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Examining and explaining slides.
Describe cell organelles from slides.
Exam cellular ultrastructures.
Ability to discuss and defend arguments.
Using computers and internet.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Using illustrations materials
Laboratory training.
Activities and homework.
Discussion
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Midterm and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of oral presentations.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work alone
To be able to work in a team to conduct a specific project.
Participating discussion results of work in groups.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Using smart class rooms.
Encouraging students to analyse data and write reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Estimating of student’s reports and its conclusion in discussion.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
32
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work alone or in a team.
Enabling students to search and discuss.
Using computers and internet for research purposes.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit activities and assignments
Discussion
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the discussing ability.
Evaluating the activities.
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Written exam (1) 6 10%
2
Written exam (2) 10 10%
3
Lab. Exam. 13 30%
4
Final Exam. 15 50%
33
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
The supervision done by the staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 8 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
6. Required Text(s)
Al-Saleh, A. Cytology. Dar El-Kheregen
Al-Khalifa, M.S. general Physiology. King Saud University
7. Essential References
1. Fowcett, The Cell
2. Campbell and Reece Text book of BIOLOGY. Pearson Education, Inc. San
Francisco
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
Websites on the internet that are relevant to the topics of the course
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Modern lecture rooms equipped with all materials.
Modern laboratories.
8. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes – electron microscope – slides – incubators – autoclaves –water baths
- safety facilities
34
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Course evaluation by students.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental course committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme.
5 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Purchasing Modern microscopes and keeping their maintenance.
Implementation of the suggestions made by the departmental course
committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
When required, reviewing assessments by a special committee from the
department.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
35
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 245: Histology
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
36
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Histology (Zoo 245)
2. Credit hours 2.0
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. NOORY TAHER TAIB
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
2 level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
General Zoology (Zoo 101)
10. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
37
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
Study of the major animal tissues, their various classes. The study includes epithelial,
connective, muscular, vascular and nervous tissues. Finding out the relationship
between structure and functions of various physiological system.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental course planning committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments,
slides and new preparations.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with equivalent local and international
courses.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
Introduction and different kind of animal tissues. 2 4
Epithelial tissues and their functions 3 6
Connective tissues and their functions. 2 4
Mascular tissues and their functions, 2 4
Vascular tissues and their functions. 2 4
Narvous tissues and their functions. 3 6
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 28 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship 28
Other:
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average :for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
28
38
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Recognise structures of different tissues comprising various organs of
physiological systems.
Find out the relationship between organ structure and their functions
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using PowerPoint presentation and illustrations)
Laboratory practice and microscope examination. (Conducting
experiments and writing reports).
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Major and final exams
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
Results of histological sections examination.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Ability to examine different sections and compare between various tissue
types.
Enable students to prepare and examine slides.
39
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of histological illustrations
Laboratory training on identifying various tissue types.
Activities related to lab work.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Major and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of activities of examining histological sections.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Enable students to work in a team to conduct a specific project.
To implement duties related to specific projects.
Communicating results of work to other histologists.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Using power point presentation.
Using histological illustrations.
Hands on training on histological techniques.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of group projects related to histological features.
Evaluation of projects conducted individually concerning different animal
tissues of various organs.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Enable student to share with others in conducting a specific project.
Ability to find solutions of scientific difficulties.
Ability to conduct searches and restore information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Encouraging students to submit lab activities and writing reports related
to the animal tissue and features.
40
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the laboratory written reports
Evaluating student’s response to oral discussion.
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( activities and homework) 3-6-8 10%
2
Monthly Exam. 9 10%
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
41
E Learning Resources
9. Required Text(s)
Directory of student animal histology
2. Essential References
As above
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
Various histology books
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
Websites on the internet that are relevant to the topics of the course
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Modern lecture rooms.
Equipped laboratories.
10. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes – electron microscope – slides –equipment –: 25 Modern microscopes
with attach camera.
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questioners for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
42
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental course committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the department.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Installation of modern microscopes, digital labs and maintenance.
Implementation of suggestions administration
Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
43
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 262: Microtechnique
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
44
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Microtechnique (Zoo 262)
2. Credit hours 2.0 (1+1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Dr. Mohammed S. Al-Khalifa & Prof. Dr. Ali S. Al-Akel
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Fifth
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Zoo 103
11. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
N. A.
45
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
Student should have a clear concept of the following :
- Preparing different types of chemical fixatives
- Identifying steps used in animal microtechniques and staining slides
- Light Microscope and their techniques
- Electron Microscope and their techniques
Animal tissues samples preparation of electron microscopy (TEM & SEM
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Course planning committee review the contents of the course annually.
Updating the course with latest research in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments and
new preparations.
Use of Internet Search on the subject.
Comparison of course topics with equivalent local and international
courses.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
Fixatives: Advantages & Disadvantages
3
9
Light Microscopy and Animal
Microtecniques
4 12
Transmission Electron Microscope 2 6
Transmission Electron Microscope and
Techniques
3
9
Scanning Electron Microscope and its
techniques
2 6
46
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 14 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship 28
Other:
-
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
30
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned. – 2 Exams 2nd
and
4th
Month
Written Papers about the Various Aspects of the Course
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Dealing with Light Microscopy, applications and operations
Identify structures of SEM and TEM and how to operate
Knowing how to prepare samples and reagents for TEM and SEM
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
Preparing Worksheets with drawings
Use of Power Point for presentation in Lecture.
Question Answer session.
Students response to instructors questions
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Assessment of oral discussion sessions.
47
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Proper usage of the Light Microscope.
Preparing the operational requirements of Light and Electron Microscope.
Training the necessary skills of operating TEM and SEM
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Students participation on operating Light Microscope & Electron
Microscopes
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Major and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Estimation of activities and assignments.
Consideration of student participation in oral discussion
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Participating with classmates to conduct a specific project.
Working independently to conduct a specific project with minimal
supervision.
Ability to communicate results of work to others.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Using power points presentation.
Train students to prepare section for both light and electron microscopy
and how to examine the preparations.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of student participation in preparing materials and sections for
both light and electron microscopy.
Student’s ability to interpret various histological features
48
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Enable students to work in a team to conduct a specific project.
Enable students to search and discuss.
Enable students to discuss abnormal structure of histological sections
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Urging students to submit activities, of lab work and writing reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the laboratory written reports
Estimating activities related to preparing histological sections.
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not Applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not Applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not Applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( activities and homework) 3-6-8 10%
2
Monthly Exam. 9 10%
3 Lab. Homework 12 5%
49
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
6
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
11. Required Text(s)
- Al-Khalifa, M. S. and Al-Saleh, A. A. (2008). "Microscopes and their
Technology" Scientific Publications King Saud University pp 378
2. Essential References
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Modern lecture rooms.
Equipped laboratories.
Transmission Electron Microscope and Scanning Electron Microscope
50
12. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes – and related equipment, Chemicals and reagents.
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questioners for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental course committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the department.
4 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
a. Installation of modern microscopes, digital labs and maintenance.
b. Implementation of suggestions administration
c. Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
d. Monitoring of teaching activates by administration.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
51
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 305: Animal Taxonomy
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
52
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Animal Taxonomy (Zoo 305)
2. Credit hours 2 (1 + 1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Mikky A. Amoudi
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Fifth level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
General Zoology (Zoo 103 )
12. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
53
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
To let student get.
- History and general principle of taxonomy
- The objectives of taxonomy and contributions of Taxonomy to Biology.
- Theories of Taxonomy.
- Animal population and their Diversity, Dynamic of Reproductive
Isolation.
- Taxonomic characters and procedures of classification.
- Presentation of the Taxonomic findings
- Principles and interpretation of Zoological Nomenclature.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental course planning committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with those equivalent from local and
international universities
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
Principles of animal taxonomy and its application. 2 2
Methods of Taxonomy. 2 2
Theories of taxonomy 2 2
Taxonomic variations within individual And
population.
1 1
Steps for taxonomic preparation. 1 1
Collecting and animal collections 2 2
Keys and statistical analysis. 2 2
International rules of Zoological nomenclature. 1 1
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture:
13
Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 13
Other:
54
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
26
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Define methods of studying Taxonomic problems.
Recognise biological diversity, based on taxonomy.
Using taxonomic keys to classify taxonomic findinds.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using PowerPoint and illustrations)
Laboratory practice and stereoscopic examination. (Conducting
experiments and writing reports).
Activities and field sampling techniques.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Major and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities related to implement taxonomic procedures
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Record and describe samples of various species.
Finding out individual variations within species.
Use computers and internet to aid in data analysis.
55
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Field training.
Laboratory training.
Activities and use of taxonomic procedures
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Major and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities related to taxonomic tests.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to describe, identify and classify field specimens.
Ability to recognise the prevailing animal species in the environment
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Power point presentations.
Taxonomic illustration.
Performing field trips for specimen collection.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of group projects.
Assessment of projects conducted individually.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to acquire principles of classifying animal specimen.
Develop skills to identify specimen following taxonomic keys.
Use of computers and internet and modern techniques in taxonomy.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Enhancement of student capability in field work and specimen
identification together with writing reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the field trips written reports
56
Estimating the laboratory written reports
Evaluating activities related to taxonomic procedures.
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( activities and homework) 3-6-8 10%
2
Monthly Exam. 9 10%
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ Week.
57
E Learning Resources
1. Required Text(s)
- Mayer, E., Linsely, G. and Usinger, R. 1966. Principle of systematic
Zoology
- Goto, H.E. 1982 Animal taxonomy
2. Essential References
As above
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
- Mayer, E., Linsely, G. and Usinger, R. 1966. Principle of systematic
Zoology.
- Simpson, G. G. 1990. Principles of animal taxonomy.
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
Websites on the internet that are relevant to the topics of the course
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Advanced lecture rooms.
Equipped laboratories.
Department museum.
13. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionnaires for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
58
Peer consultation by departmental course committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the department.
5 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Installation of modern microscopes, digital labs.
Suggestions made by the departmental course committee.
Preservation of taking into consideration the collected animal samples.
Strengths the student observation and sensation to recognize animal species.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
59
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 311: General Entomology
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
60
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to ........ of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: General Entomology Zoo 311
2. Credit hours 3.0 (2 +1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Dr. Mohammed S. Al-Khalifa
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Sixth
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Zoo 103
13. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
Not Applicable
61
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
Student should have a clear concept of the following :
Taxonomic Position of Insects in the Animal
Kingdom
Body Wall / Composition/Derivatives/Ecdysis
Head and its derivatives
Antenna and its Modifications
Mouth Parts and its Modifications
Abdomen
Legs and their forms
Wings and their Modifications
Abdomen and its Derivatives
Different Forms of Ovipositor
Internal Anatomy
Digestive System
Circulatory System
Respiratory System
Excretory System
Nervous System
Reproductive System
Embryonic Development in Insects
Life Cycles in Insects
Classification of Insects.
Endocrine systemised hormones
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Course Planning Committee reviews the contents of the course annually.
Updating the course with latest research in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments,
slides and new preparations.
Use of Internet Search on the subject.
Comparison of course topics with equivalent courses inlocal and
international universities.
62
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
Taxonomic Position of Insects in the Animal
Kingdom
1 4
Body Wall /
Composition/Derivatives/Ecdysis
1 4
Head and its derivatives 1 4
Antenna and its Modifications 2 8
Mouth Parts and its Modifications 3 12
Legs and their forms 1 4
Abdomen and its Derivatives
1 4
Insect Anatomy
1 4
Life Cycle and Embryonic Development 2 8
Taxonomic evaluation 3 12
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 28 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 28
Other:
-
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
45
63
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned. – 2 Exams 2nd
and
4th
Month
-2 Written Papers about the Various Aspects of the
Course
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Recall Taxonomic Position of Insects in the Animal Kingdom.
Describe the external anatomy of insects, such as head, wings, antennae,
etc..
Recognise the internal anatomy of insects including various body systems.
Define insect metamorphosis and taxonomy
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
Preparing Worksheets with drawing.
Use of Power Point for presentation in the Lecture.
Question Answer session.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Two seasonal assessments
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of field activities.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Ability to identify and classify the Common Insects based on taxonomic
procedures.
Enable students to describe the modifications of different body parts of
Insects.
64
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of Whole Insect Specimens
Practical Observations on the Insects.
Activities related to collected insect samples.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Major and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and oral discussion
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to describe the morphological features of insects.
Discuss finding with colleagues and ability to classify insects.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Use of entomological illustration
Use of power point presentation
Field trips for collecting insects
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of group projects.
Assessment of projects conducted individually.
Oral presentation and discussion.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Solve scientific difficulties in the field of insect taxonomy.
Using of computers and internet.
Presentation of results ans discussion with specialists in the field.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Encouraging students to submit field activities, labwork and writing
reports.
65
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills Group
Discussion
Evaluating the laboratory written reports
Evaluating field activities and lab work
Oral discussion
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not Applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not Applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not Applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( activities and homework) 3-6-8 10%
2
Monthly Exam. 9 10%
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
66
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
14. Required Text(s)
- Elzinga , Richard, S. (1997) Fundamentals of Entomology 4th
eds. Prentice Hall,
Upper Saddle River, New Jersey 07458
-Badaway, Ali, A. and Al-suhaibany, Al-, M. General Entomology , Morphology ,
Internal Structure, King Saud University Academic Publications 2nd
ed.
2004(Arabic Text)
2. Essential References
Richards, O. W. and R. G. Davies (1977) Imm's General Text Book of
Entomology, 10th
ed. Land Chapman & Hall.
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
Romoser, W. S. (1998) The Science of Entomology, 3rd
ed. Macmillian Pub. Co.
Inc. N.Y. & London.
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Modern lecture rooms.
Equipped laboratories.
2. Computing resources
67
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes – Whole Insect Specimens, Insect Nets, Killing Jars, Aspirators,
Spreading Board, Insect Box, safety Facilities.
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental course committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the department.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
a. Installation of modern microscopes, digital labs.
b. Implementation of suggestions by departmental course committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
68
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 317: Medical Arthropods
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
69
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Medical Arthropods (Zoo 317)
2. Credit hours 3 (2 + 1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Mikky A. Amoudi
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Four level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any) (Zoo 311 )
14. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
70
B. Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
- Morphology, Classification, Biology and host-parasite relationships of
minor medical importance such as Cockroaches, beetles, ants, wasps,
moths.
- Those of major medical importance, such as Blood sucking.
- Venoms, Defense secretions and Allergens of arthropods.
- Epidemiology of selected pathogens causing indigenous diseases in Saudi
Arabia.
- Control and Personal protections of arthropod pests.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental course planning committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with equivalent courses of local and
international universities.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
Morphology, Classification, Biology and host-parasite
relationships of minor medical importance such as
Cockroaches, beetles, ants, wasps, moths.
2 2
Those of major medical importance, such as Blood
sucking including Order Hemiptera, F. Cimieidae e.g.
Bed bugs
2 2
Order : Anoplura, F. Pediculidae (body louse); Order :
Diptera, Suborder Nematocera, F. Ceratopogonidae
(biting midges), F. Simuliidae (black flies)
2 2
Psychodidae (sand flies) and F. Culicidae (mosquitoes);
Suborder Brachycera, F. Rhagionidae (snipe flies), F.
Tabanidae (horse flies)
1 1
Suborder Cyclorrhapha, Calliogoridae (blow flies),
Sarcophagidae (flesh flies), Muscidae (house flies)
2 2
71
Glossinidae (tse tse flies) and Hipposcidae (louse flies);
Order : Siphonaptera (fleas).
2 2
Order : Acariformes (mite-borne diseases); Order :
Acarina (ticks and associated diseases).
1 1
Venoms, Defense secretions and Allergens of
arthropods. Epidemiology of selected pathogens
causing indigenous diseases in Saudi Arabia. Control
and Personal protections of arthropod pests.
1 1 Control and Personal protections of arthropod pests. 1 1
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 14 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 14
Other:
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
28
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Recognise morphology, classification and host-parasite relationship of
minor and major medical importance.
Define Venoms, Defense secretions and Allergens of arthropods.
State Control and Personal protections of arthropod pests.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using PowerPoint and illustrations)
Laboratory practice and microscope examination. (Conducting
experiments and writing reports).
Collecting technique, activities and lab work.
72
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Estimation of collecting technique, activities, written reports and lab work.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Record and describe medically important arthropods systemically.
Use computers and internet to search and discuss information obtained for
field specimens.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Field training including collecting technique.
Laboratory training.
Ppt presentation and illustration.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Med-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and lab work.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Describe characters of different medically important arthropods
Work in a team to conduct control arthropods pests.
Discuss defence secretion of arthropods with colleagues.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Ppt presentation and illustration
Collecting technique activities in the field
Laboratory technique.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of group projects.
Assessment of projects conducted individually.
Oral discussion.
73
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to collect arthropods of medical importance.
Solve scientific difficulties related to medical arthropods.
Use computers and internet for research purposes.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Urging students to submit activities, lab work and writing reports.
(iv) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the field trips written reports
Evaluating the laboratory and held activities written reports.
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( activities and homework) 3-6-8 10%
2
Monthly Exam. 9 10%
3 Lab. Homework 12 5%
74
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ Week.
E Learning Resources
15. Required Text(s)
Harwood, R., James, M. 1979. Entomology in Human and Animal health.
2. Essential References
As above
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
Harwood, R., James, M. 1979. Entomology in Human and Animal health.
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
Websites on the internet that are relevant to the topics of the course
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Modern lecture rooms.
Equipped laboratories.
Department museum.
16. Computing resources
75
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental course committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the department.
1 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
1.1 Installation of modern microscopes, digital labs.
1.2 Implementation of suggestions by departmental course committee.
1.3 Preserved medically important arthropods and collections available for
study
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental course committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
76
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 320: Ichthyology
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
77
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Ichthyology (Zoo 320)
2. Credit hours 2.0
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Bachelor degree in Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Dr. Naser Al-Asgah
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Fifth level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Chordates (Zoo 222)
15. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
78
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
1- Classification of fish.
2- Fish Biology, external and internal features.
3- Fish diversity of Saudi Arabia.
4- Fish ecology and Zoogeography.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental course planning committee.
Updating the course with the latest developments in the field and using
internet materials.
Updating practical sessions with new experiments and slides.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contact
hours
Introduction 1 1
Fishes habitat. 3 3
Different Body Systems. 6 6
Growth and age. 1 1
Specialized organs in fish 1 1
Fish diversity of Saudi Arabia. 1 1
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture:
14
Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork/Internship:
14
Other: -
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
28
79
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
1- Classify various types of fish, based on taxonomic procedures.
2- Biological factors affecting fish ecology and Zoogeography in Saudi Arabia.
3- Identify external features of different systems and their functions.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
Lectures are given in PowerPoint and presentation and illustrations.
Practical studies.
Reports and Oral presentations.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of written field reports.
Evaluation of lab reports.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Classification of different fishes.
Fish dissection.
Handling of fish in the lab.
Practical studies of fish systems.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Using illustrations materials
Laboratory training.
Field activities and lab work.
80
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams.
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations.
Evaluation of activities and lab work.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
To be able to work in a team to dissect fish and recognise internal system.
To be able to discus results of work in groups.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Practical studies
Illustrations
Reports and oral presentations
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of group work.
Assessment of Individual work.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team.
Ability to write and present reports.
Ability to use computers and internet to retrieve information on fish
biology.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Encouraging students to submit activities and assignments
Using students to write and present reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating of practical studies
Evaluating activities
81
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Reports - activities homework 3-6-8 10%
2
Midterm Exam. 9 10%
3
Lab. report 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
The supervision done by the staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
17. Required Text(s)
(Books in Arabic)
1- Alblowy, H. F. (2005). Ichthylogy. KSU, Saudi Arabia.
82
2- Amin, I. M. (1994), Introduction of Ichthylogy. College of Science, Qatar
University, Qatar.
18. Essential References
Bone et al., (1999). Biological of fishes (2nd
edition). Stanley Thornes (Publisher).
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
Websites on the internet that are relevant to the topics of the course
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Modern lecture rooms equipped with all materials.
Modern laboratories.
19. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes – – fish tissue sections – incubators – autoclaves –water baths –
Water quality measurements- fish aquaria safety facilities.
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Course evaluation by students.
Interview of some new students.
2. Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental course committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme.
83
3. Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Purchasing Modern microscopes and keeping their maintenance.
Implementation of the suggestions made by the departmental course
committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
When required, reviewing assessments by a special committee from the
department.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of the course and equivalent courses giving in Zoology
departments at some university.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Updating courses with new topics in the field.
Improving the teaching methods for the course using evaluation made by
students.
84
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 325: Ornithology
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
85
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Ornithology (Zoo 325)
2. Credit hours 2.0
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Mansour I. Almansour
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Level six
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Zoo 103
16. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
86
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
Providing students with information on history of birds, its economic impact
and general characteristics of birds and outer structure of birds and its
functions.
Determine chromosomal aberrations and syndromes.
Understand the mechanism, importance, cost and reading molt and
mechanism of the metabolism and temperature regulation in birds.
To acquire students with hunting birds decencies, hunting for scientific
purposes, and the benefit of eating meat of the birds and migration patterns.
Bird's diseases and ways of controlling these diseases.
The major bird’s system structures and functions.
To acquire students the taxonomic procedures of birds.
Methods of preserving birds and its habitat, and knowing the organizations
concerning about that.
Bird’s conversation and its habitat and concerned organization.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental course planning committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments,
slides and new preparations.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with equivalent courses from local and
international universities.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
Introduction and properties of general characteristics
of birds
1 1
Outer structure of birds and its functions 1 1
Aspects of the impact of birds on the ecosystem 1 1
Mechanism, importance, cost and reading moult 1 1
87
Mechanism of the metabolism and temperature
regulation in birds
1 1
Flying types, and mating patterns
1 1
Hunting birds decency, hunting for scientific purposes ,
and the benefit of eating meat of the birds
1 1
Birds Migration
2 2
Bird's disease and ways of protection. 1 1
Major birds system structures and function 1 1
Methods of of preserving birds and its habitat, and
knowing the organizations concerning about that.
1 1
Birds taxonomy & what is new in ornithology 1 1
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 14 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 14
Other:
-
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
14
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
88
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Notice general characteristics of birds and taxonomy.
Describe outer structure of birds and its functions.
Describe the mechanism, importance, cost and reading moult and birds flying
types, and mating patterns
Define the mechanism of the metabolism and temperature regulation in birds
and major bird’s system structures and function.
Knowledge of hunting birds decencies, hunting for scientific purposes , and the
benefit of eating meat of the birds
Knowledge of bird’s migration and conservation.
Knowledge of bird's disease and control.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using PowerPoint and illustrations)
Laboratory practice and microscope examination. (Conducting
experiments and writing reports).
Activities and reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Enable student to dissect birds.
Prepare slides and samples.
Prepare lab solutions used in ornithological procedures.
Enable students to use computers and internet for searching and analysing
genetic data.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of illustrations
Laboratory training.
Activities and assignments.
89
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to present related information.
Ability to recognise different types of birds.
Ability to investigate birds diseases and its control.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Power point presentation.
Ornithological illustrations.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of group projects.
Assessment of projects conducted individually.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Work in a team to collect information on birds.
Solve scientific difficulties.
Dissect birds and know each organ and its functions.
Using computers and internet to conduct searches.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Encouraging students to submit activities and written reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the laboratory written reports.
Estimating activities and assignments
90
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( activities and homework) 3-6-8 10%
2
Monthly Exam. 9 10%
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 5 hr/ week
91
E Learning Resources
20. Required Text(s)
- Summaries of Bird Dissection. King. A.S. and McClelland, G. Publisher, King Saud University
- Anatomy and physiology of poultry. First Editoinp. Abdel Fattah Darwish, and Alhbak, M. I.S.B.N 977-223
2. Essential References
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
Cramp S. and Simmons K.E.L. 1983. The birds of the western Palearctic, Vol. III.
Oxford University Press, Oxford.
. Carey C. 1996. Avian energetics and nutritional ecology. Carey C. (Ed).
Chapman and Hall, New York.
R.F. Porter, S. Christensen, P. Shiermacker-Hansen 1996. Birds of the
Middle East. Published by ACADEMIC PRESS INC. San Diego, CA 92101
Brooke M. and Birkhead T. 1991. The Cambridge Encyclopaedia
Ornithology. Cambridge University Pres
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
www.ncwcd.gov.sa
www.fatbirder.com
www.birdtours.co.uk
www.birdlifemed.org
www.arabianwildlife.com
www.osme.org
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
92
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Modern lecture rooms.
Equipped laboratories.
21. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes – Ornithological sections –dissection materials- incubators –
autoclaves – titration equipment – measuring equipment –water baths – digital
lab. - safety facilities
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questioners for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental course committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the department.
2 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
c. Installation of modern microscopes, digital labs.
d. Implementation of suggestions by departmental course committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental course committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
93
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 326: Mammology
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
94
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Mammology (Zoo 326)
2. Credit hours 2
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology Department – B Sc. Zoology
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Abdulaziz N. Alagaili
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Sixth level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Chordates (Zoo 222)
17. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
95
B. Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
Understanding distinct features of mammals.
Recognizing major theories of mammalian evolution.
Understanding Physiological and behavioural adaptations of mammals in
response to ecological stimuli.
Recognizing mammalian diversity and understanding general characters of
some major mammalian groups.
Understanding basic ecological and conservation concepts regarding
mammals.
Identifying mammalian species inhabiting the Arabian Peninsula.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental course planning committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments,
slides and new preparations.
Updating course resources.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
General traits of modern mammals 2 2
Mammalian evolution 1 1
Mammalian biology 5 5
Mammalian ecology 2 2
Mammalian systematic "Mammalian Biodiversity" 4 4
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 14 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 28
Other:
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average :for the semester not a specific requirement in each week) 30
96
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
- Recognise distinct features of mammals.
- Understand the concepts of physiological and behavioural adaptation of
mammals.
- Recognise mammalian diversity.
- Identify ecological and conservation methods concerning mammalian species.
- Study the habitats of mammals in Saudi Arabia
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using PowerPoint and illustrations)
Active learning (Team Based Learning)
Laboratory practice and microscopic examinations.
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Mid-term and final exams
Estimation of lab reports
Evaluation of Activities and duties
Participation during lecture.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Reasoning, verbal reasoning, memory, perception, and intuition
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
- Raising questions.
97
- Reading and writing assignments for logical thinking.
- Student’s oral presentations.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
- Tests, Quizzes.
- Quick tests "with no reading and memorization - logical thinking".
- Lab practice
- Weekly assignments.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Leadership: decision makers, motivating others, directing others,
guidance.
Communication: active communication, self confidence.
Teamwork: collaboration, participation, responsibility.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Asking questions.
Case problems to be solved.
Student’s participation in teaching others.
Motivate students to ask questions to their classmates.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of group work (assignments, projects, departmental seminars
etc.)
Evaluation of individual participation.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to perform specific task.
Ability to search for mammalian information from different resources.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Class activities.
Lab work
Writing reports.
98
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Laboratory written reports evaluation
Evaluation of class activities and assignments
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
N/A
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
N/A
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
N/A
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( activities and homework) 3-6-8 10%
2
Monthly Exam. 6+10 10%
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
99
E Learning Resources
Required Text(s)
Feldhamer, G. A., L. C. Drickamer, S. H. Vessey, and J. F. Merritt. 2007.
Mammalogy: adaptation, diversity, and ecology. 2nd edition. McGraw-Hill, New
York, 576 pp.
2. Essential References
Feldhamer, G. A., L. C. Drickamer, S. H. Vessey, and J. F. Merritt. 2007.
Mammalogy: adaptation, diversity, and ecology. 2nd edition. McGraw-Hill, New
York, 576 pp.
Vaughan, T. A., J. M. Ryan, and N. J. Czaplewski. 1999. Mammalogy. 4th edition
Harcourt, Fort Worth, 566 pp.
Harrison, D. L. and P. J. J. Bates 1991. The Mammals of Arabia (2nd ed). Harrison
Zoological Museum Publication. England.
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
Martin, R. E., Pine, R., and DeBlase, A. F. 2000. A Manual of Mammalogy, 3nd
edition
Lawlor, T.E. 1979. Handbook to the orders and families of living mammals. Mad
River Press, Eureka, CA
Wilson, D. E. and D. M. Reeder. 2005. Mammal Species of the World. A
Taxonomic and Geographic Reference (3rd ed), Johns Hopkins University Press,
2,142pp.
Deblase, A.F. & R.E. Martin (1981). A manual of Mammalogy with keysto families
of the world. W.M.C. Brown company publishers, Iowa, U.S.A
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
Websites on the internet that are relevant to the topics of the course
Wilson, D. E. and D. M. Reeder (eds.). 2005. Mammal Species of the World. A
Taxonomic and Geographic Reference (3rd ed), Johns Hopkins University Press,
2,142 pp. (on line edition):
http://www.bucknell.edu/msw3/
Animal Diversity Web, The University of Michigan Museum of Zoology:
http://animaldiversity.ummz.umich.edu/site/accounts/information/Mammalia.html
The Hall of Mammals:
http://www.ucmp.berkeley.edu/mammal/mammal.html
Animal Info (endangered species):
100
http://www.animalinfo.org/index.htm
Mammalia Tree of Life Web Project:
http://tolweb.org/tree?group=Mammalia&contgroup=Therapsida
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
None
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Fully equipped lecture rooms: smart boards, projectors etc.
Fully equipped laboratories.
22. Computing resources
None
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes – mammalian histological sections – incubators – chemicals - digital
scales – calibres – rulers - safety facilities etc.
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Course evaluation by students by the end of the semester.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental course committee.
Self-evaluation of the course.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Training professors in new teaching strategies.
Visiting other departments worldwide for knowledge exchange regarding
teaching strategies.
101
Use of effective learning and teaching strategies (active learning).
Installation of modern microscopes, digital labs.
Implementation of suggestions recommended by departmental course
committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses worldwide if possible.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental course committee.
Updating course resources.
102
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 327: Herpetology
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
103
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Herpetology (Zoo 327)
2. Credit hours 3 (2+1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Mohammed K. Al-Sadoon
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Fifth level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Principles of Zoology (Zoo 103 )
18. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
104
B. Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
To let students get acquainted with the following :
The general characters of Amphibia and Reptiles and it's classification.
The Anatomical studies of Amphibia and Reptilia.
Knowledge regarding the families and orders of Amphibia and Reptilia.
The Ecological adaptation of Amphibia and Reptilia in their environments.
The Amphibians and Reptilians species in Saudi habitats.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental course planning committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with equivalent courses taught in local and
international institutions.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contact
hours
- General Introduction
- General Characters of Amphibia and Reptilia
- Reproduction of Amphibia and Reptilia
- Fertilization of Amphibia and Reptilia
- Homeostatis of Amphibia and Reptilia
- Relations with habitats
- Classification of Amphibia and Reptilia
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
2
4
4
4
4
4
6
105
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 28 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 28
Other:
-
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
15
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
To let students get acquainted with the following :
General characters of Amphibia and Reptilia.
Classification of Amphibia and Reptilia.
Various species of Amphibia and Reptilia inhabiting Saudi environment.
Ecophysiology of Amphibia and Reptilia.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In class lecturing (Power point presentation)
Laboratory practice and microscopic examinations. (Conducting
experiments concerning metabolic activities and writing reports).
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Monthly and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports on executed experiments
106
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Examine and dissect amphibian and reptilian species.
Use computers and internet to extract herpetological information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of illustrations and experimentation
Laboratory training on herpetology.
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Monthly and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports concerning lab experiments
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to classify amphibian and reptilian samples.
Ability to develop self confidence to understand experimental study.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Using smart classroom equipped with advanced facilities.
Developing the course contents according to recent publications.
Nominate certain group of student to conduct specific experiment in
physiological aspects of herpetology.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of group working students.
Evaluation of duties accomplished by individual student.
107
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to let students engaged in general oral discussion.
Ability to use computers and internet for gathering updated information in
the field of herpetology.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Urging students to submit activities and written reports using internet
recourses.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the student`s ability in oral discussion.
Evaluating student communicating ability with others
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activities ( activities, homework and practical exam )
3-6-8 30%
2
Monthly Exam -1-. 9 10%
3 Monthly Exam -2- 13 10 % 4
Final Exam. 15 50%
108
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
23. Required Text(s)
- Introduction to Herpetology by Goin & Goin (1971).
- Goin & Goin ( 1971) Introduction to Herpetology .
-Pough, F. H. (2001). Herpetology. Sec. ed. Printice – Hall, inc. N. J.
- Al-Sadoon, M. K. (2004). Practical Manual of Reptiles. King Saud University.
2. Essential References
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Advanced lecture rooms.
Equipped laboratories.
24. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
None
109
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings with open discussion.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental course committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the department.
4 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
e. Installation of modern microscopes and digital labs and maintenance.
f. Implementation of suggestions recommended by departmental course
committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental course committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
110
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 332: General Physiology
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
111
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
B. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: General Physiology (Zoo 332)
2. Credit hours 3.0 (2+1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Saleh A. Kandeal
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Sixth level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Principles of Zoology (Zoo 103 )
19. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
112
B. Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
To let students get acquainted with the following :
Structure and functions of Physiological systems.
Fitness of Structure to function.
Interpretation of Physical Phenomena occurring in the body from
Physiological point of view.
Physiological changes taking place as a result of environmental changes
and the role of the nervous system.
Homeostasis and means of achieving it.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental course planning committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments,
slides and new preparations.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with equivalent local and international
courses.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contact
hours
- Introduction
- Physiology of Digestive System and absorption
- Blood , Heart , Circulation
- Physiology of Respiration
- Physiology of Excretion
- Nervous System & neural control
- Physiology of Reproduction ( Male & Female )
1
4
3
1.5
1.5
2
2
2
8
6
3
3
4
4
113
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 28 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 28
Other:
-
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
30
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
To let students get acquainted with the following :
Structure and functions of Physiological system.
Enable students to interpret physiological phenomena
Recognise the role of the adverse environmental factors on the
physiological states.
Identifying different means for achieving homostosis.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing ppt presentation
Laboratory practice and microscopic examination of tissue sections from
various organs.
Conducting physiological experiments and writing reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Major and final exams
114
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of reports resulted from experiments.
Participation of students in oral discussion.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Capability of students to dissect experimental animals, and identify various
systems.
Microscopic examination to differentiate between different organs.
Recognising physiological changes.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Simplifying physiological mechanism through data show ppt and
physiological illustration.
Laboratory training on dissecting experimental animals.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Midterm and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations of tissue sections of organs.
Estimate of Activities and results of physiological experiments.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Enable students to understand the relationship between environmental
factors and physiological phenomena.
Work in a team to conduct a specific project.
Work independently to conduct a specific project.
Communicate results of work to others.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Recognising the integrated role of nervous system and Endocrine system in
regulating physiological functions.
Identify physiological system through discussion procedures.
Power point presentation using physiological illustrations.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
115
Assessment of group projects.
Assessment of projects conducted individually.
Performance of students in practical sessions.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to conduct specific physiological experiments.
Ability to use computers and internet for research purposes.
Presenting and discussing the results obtained.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Encouraging students to submit duties, activities and writing reports
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the laboratory written reports resulted from physiological
experiments.
Evaluating activities
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1 Monthly Exam. 1 7 10%
116
2
Monthly Exam. 2 10 10%
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
25. Required Text(s)
-
- Guyton, A. C. and J. E. Hall (1996) Textbook of
Medical Physiology 9th
ed. , Saunders Co., Philad., Lond.
- Tortora, G.J. & Grabowski. S. R. (2006) Principles of Anatomy and Physiology,
Tenth Edition. John Wiley & Sons Inc USA
2. Essential References
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
Websites on the internet that are relevant to the topics of the course
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
117
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Modern lecture rooms.
Equipped laboratories.
26. Computing resources
Computer room containing at least 30 systems
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes - histological sections – incubators – autoclaves – titration equipment
– measuring equipments –water baths – digital scales. - safety facilities
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental course committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the Department.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
4.1 Installation of modern microscopes, digital labs.
4.2 Implementation of suggestions by departmental course committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental course committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
118
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 342: Molecular Biology
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
119
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Molecular Biology (Zoo 342)
2. Credit hours 2 ( 1 + 1 )
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Mohammed A. Al-Wadaan
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
The Sixth level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Cell biology and physiology ( Zoo 242 ) proposed Basic genetics ( Zoo 352 )
20. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
120
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
- Characteristics of the genetic material andf DNA structure.
- DNA and RNA as the genetic material.
-- Gene concept at the molecular level.
- DNA organization in chromosomes and DNA replication.
- Concepts and regulation of gene expression.
- Gel electrophoresis and gene libraries.
- Polymerase Chain Reaction (PCR).
- DNA sequencing and analysis.
- Genetic engineering and its application.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Updating the course with the latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating of the practical sessions with new experiments
and current techniques.
Updating the course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of the course topics with that equivalent course taught in local
and international universities.
C. Course description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contact
hours
Topics :
- Characteristics of the genetic material. 1 1
- DNA as the genetic material.
- RNA as the genetic material in some viruses.
2 2
- DNA structure. 1 1
- Gene concept at the molecular level. 1 1
- DNA organization in chromosomes and DNA replication. 1 1
- Gene expression concept. 1 1
- Regulation of gene expression. 1 1
- Regulation of gene expression in eukaryotes 1 1
- Gel electrophoresis and gene libraries. 1 1
- Polymerase Chain Reaction (PCR). 1 1
- Sequencing and sequence analysis. 1 2
- Biotechnology, transgenic organisms and gene therapy. 1 2
121
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 13 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 13
Other:
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
26
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Identifying characteristics of the genetic material and DNA structure.
Recalling molecular structure of the gene.
Recognizing DNA organization in chromosomes and DNA replication.
Describing gene expression regulation process.
Outlining gel electrophoresis and gene libraries.
Identifying polymerase Chain Reaction (PCR) and DNA sequencing.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In class lecturing (using PowerPoint presentation and illustrations)
Laboratory practice on new techniques involved in DNA technology, DNA
extraction and PCR implication.
Activities and assignments.
122
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Written and oral periodical and final exams.
Lab exams and reports.
Evaluation of lab activities results
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Prepare lab solutions and reagent.
Understanding instructions and operate DNA equipment
Use statistical methods to analyze genetic data.
Use computer and internet to search the latest information in DNA
technology.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of genetic illustrations and power point presentation
Laboratory training on different DNA techniques.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports on operating equipment
Evaluation of student activities and assignments
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific experiment.
Ability to work independently to deal with DNA facilities
Ability to present results of work to classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Close monitoring while performing
Practical work
Using power point presentation and illustration
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of student cooperation in lab sessions.
123
Evaluation of the obtained lab results
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to obtain results of practical work.
Ability to be involved in general discussion and suggest solution for
difficulties.
Ability to use computer and internet to search for DNA realted
information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit lab and internal activities and written
reports.
(v) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the written reports and contribution in general discussion
Evaluating lab and internal activities
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
124
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( Homework, activities, discussion)
3, 5, 8, 12 10%
2
Monthly Exams. 7, 12 20%
3
Lab. Exam. 13 30%
4
Final Exam. 15 40%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab Sessions.
Office hours 6 hr/ Week.
E Learning Resources
27. Required Text(s)
Biomedical Science Explained: Molecular Genetics by J T Handbook, 1st edition, 1999.
2. Essential References
Allison, L. A. (2008): Fundamental Molecular Biology. 2nd
edition, Wiley-Blackwell
Ltd.; Malden, MA, USA.
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (attach List)
Weaver R. F. (2008). Molecular Biology. McGraw Hill Higher Education; 4th edition
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
125
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Prepared lecture rooms with audio – visual aids.
Equipped genetic lab with DNA facilities.
28. Computing resources
Digital lab containing 15 computers
29. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Incubators, autoclaves, measuring equipments, water bath, digital balances,
pH meters, safety facilities.
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental plan committee.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Installation of digital labs and DNA equipment.
Implementation of suggestions recommended by departmental specialised
committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
126
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 352: Principles of Genetics
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
127
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Principles of Genetics (Zoo 352)
2. Credit hours 2 ( 1 + 1 )
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Dr. Faisal M. Abou-Tarboush
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
The seventh level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Cytology ( Zoo 342 )
21. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
128
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
Main branches of genetics and reasons for studying it.
Investigative methods in Genetics.
The chromosomal basis of inheritance.
Meadelian and non Meadelian Inheritance.
Mutations and mechanisms of DNA repair.
Sex-determination in eukaryotes.
Genetic engineering and its applications.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Updating the course with the latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating of the practical sessions with new experiments
and current techniques.
Updating the course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of the course topics with equivalent course given in local and
international universities
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
Topics :
- Introduction (Genetics, its main branches, reasons for
studying it and the investigative methods used in
Genetics)
2 2
- Chromosomes, cell cycle and Mitosis 2 2
- Miesis and the chromosome theory 2 2
- Mendel's Laws 2 2
- Dominance, epistasis and multiple alleles 1 1
- Plieotropy and lethal genes 1 1
- Penetrance, expressivity and maternal effect 1 1
Epigenetic inheritance 1 1
Mutations and Sex-determination and linkage 1 1
Genetic engineering and its applications 1 1
129
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 21 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 14
Other:
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
25
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Student would be able to get acquainted with:
Concept of Genetics and its main branches.
Genetic model organisms.
The investigative methods used in Genetics.
Chromosomes and the cell cycle.
The chromosomal basis of inheritance (Mitosis, meiosis and their genetic
significance).
Mendel's laws and probabilities.
Concept of dominance, multiple alleles and pleiotropy.
Concept of lethal genes, penetrance and expressivity.
Non-mendelian inheritance.
Mutations and Sex-determination and Sex-linkage.
Genetic engineering and its main applications.
130
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using PowerPoint presentation and illustrations)
Laboratory practice and microscopic examination. (Conducting
experiments and writing reports).
Activities and assignments
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Mid-term and final exams.
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
The student would be able to:
Conduct, follow-up and analyze crosses in Drosophila melanogaster.
Prepare slides in mitosis and polytene chromosomes.
Use statistical methods to analyze genetic data.
Uuse computer and internet to search for genetic information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of genetic illustrations and power point presentation
Laboratory training, preparing and staining slides.
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and homework.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific experiment.
Ability to work independently to prepare and examine slides.
Ability to present results of work with classmate.
131
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Close monitoring with performing practical work
Using power point presentations and illustration
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Student cooperation in lab session.
Assessment of projects conducted individually.
Evaluation of the obtained lab results.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to obtain results of practical work.
Ability to be involved in general discussion and suggest solutions of
difficulties.
Ability to use computer and internet to search for genetic information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Urging students to submit activities, oral presentation and written reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating of the written reports and contribution in general discussion
Evaluating lab activities
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
132
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( Homework, activities, discussion)
3, 5, 8, 12 10%
2
Monthly Exams. 6, 12 20%
3
Lab. Exam. 13 30%
4
Final Exam. 15 40%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab Sessions.
Office hours 6 hr/ Week.
E Learning Resources
30. Required Text(s)
- Introduction to Genetics. Dar Al-Shourok of Publishing and Distribution, Amman, Jordan. Abdul Hadi, A.W 1998 - Laboratory training in the basics of genetics. Abu Tarboush, F.M. and Nabhan, M.M.H. 1420 H
2. Essential References
Brooker, R. J. (2009). Genetics : Analysis and Principles. McGraw-Hill, New York,
USA
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (attach List)
..- Griffuths, A. J. F. et al (2008) Introduction to genetic analysis. W. H. Freeman and
company. New York, USA.
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
133
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Prepared lecture rooms with audio – visual facilities.
Equipped genetic lab.
31. Computing resources
32. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes, Slides, Incubators, autoclaves, measuring equipments, water
bath, digital lab., safety facilities.
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialist committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental studying plans
committee.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Installation of modern microscopes and digital labs.
Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
134
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 355: Animal wildlife Genetics
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
135
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Animal Wildlife Genetics (Zoo 355)
2. Credit hours 2 (2 + 0)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Dr. Faisal M. Abou-Tarboush
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Elective course
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Principles of Genetics ( Zoo 352 )
22. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
23. Location if not on main campus
University campus
136
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
- Animal genetic diversity concept and its importance
- Loss of genetic diversity and its effects on the population
- Population size and its effects on the survival of species
- Genetic diversity conversation methods
- Genetic erosion and genetic diversity.
- Population augmentation
- gene pools and endangered species
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Updating the course with the latest developments in the field.
Updating the course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of the course topics with those equivalent courses taught to
local and international universities.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
Topics :
- Animal genetic diversity concept and its importance 1 2
- Loss of genetic diversity and its effects on the
population
2 4
- Population size and its effects on the survival of
species.
2 4
- Genetic emersion and genetic diversity 1 2
- Methods used in genetic diversity conservation 4 8
- Population augmentation 1 2
- Gene pools and endangered animal species 3 6
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 28 Tutorial: 5-7 Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 15
Other:
137
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
35
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Students would be able to define:
Animal genetic diversity
Loss of genetic diversity and its effects on the population
Genetic drift, Inbreeding and reduction in gene flow
Genetic erosion and genetic diversity
Methods used in genetic diversity conservation (Ex. Situ and In Situ
conservation)
Gene pools
Endangered animal species
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using PowerPoint presentation and illustrations)
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Mid-term and final exams.
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
b. Cognitive Skills
138
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Determine the level of genetic diversity in a species.
Diminished genetic diversity on species survival
Determine the most effective approaches to reduce the effect of decreased
population, size.
Ability to suggest methods to conserve existing genetic diversity.
Ability to use statistical methods to analyze genetic data.
Skills to use computer and internet to retrieve information reverent to
animal conservation.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of genetic illustrations
Activities and assignments.
Reports
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of weekly Activities and assignments.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific task.
Ability to work independently to analyse genetic data.
Ability to communicate results of work with classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Using power point presentation and genetic illustrations
Monitoring students’ weekly activities.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of group and individual assignments.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to collect certain information related to animal
conservation.
139
Ability to be involved in general discussions
Ability to use computer and internet to search for information related to
animal conservation
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Urging students to submit activities, written reports.
4 Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the field trips written reports
Evaluating activities and assignments
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( Homework, activities, discussion)
3, 5, 8, 12 20%
2
Monthly Exams. 7, 12 20%
3
Reports 13 20%
4
Final Exam. 15 40%
140
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over the ability of the students to solve
exercises given to them.
Office hours 8 hr/ Week.
E Learning Resources
33. Required Text(s)
- Klung, W.; Cummings, M. and Spencer, C. (2006). Concepts of Genetics.
Pearson Edu. International. New Jersey, USA.
2. Essential References
Hartl, D.L. and Jones, E.W. (2002). Essential Genetics: A Genomics Prospective.
Jones and Bartlett Publishers. Sudbury, MA, USA
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (attach List)
Brooker, R. J. (2009). Genetics : Analysis and Principles. McGraw-Hill, New York,
USA..
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Lecture rooms provided with audio – visual facilities.
34. Computing resources
141
35. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Not applicable
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental studying plan
committee.
2 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
g. Installation of digital labs.
h. Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
142
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 366: Management of Fish Culture
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
143
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Management of fish culture (Zoo 366)
2. Credit hours 2.0 (1+1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Bachelor degree in Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Dr. Naser Al-Asgah
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Elective course
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Ichthyology (Zoo322) and Chordates (Zoo 222)
24. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
144
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
1- Management of fish culture.
2- Defining Pond types and water quality monitoring.
3- Management of pond cleaning and change water.
4- Knowledge of marketing management and ice packing or freezing monitoring.
5- Defining nutrition management and preparation of fish diets.
3. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are
being implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material,
changes in content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental course planning committee.
Updating the course with the latest developments in the field and using
internet materials.
Updating practical sessions with new experiments and slides.
Comparison of the course topics with those equivalent courses taught in
local and international universities.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contact
hours
Introduction of fish farming construction. 2 4
Management of fish ponds and their types. 2 4
Water quality management. 1 2
Using of equipments to water and fish body
analysis
1 2
Management of fish production 2 4
Translation of fish fry, rearing and growing
stages.
2 4
Nutrition management (Artificial and Natural) 1 2
Monitoring of fish and suitable time for
harvest.
1 2
Fish marketing methods. 1 2
Re-using fish pond after catching season. 1 2
Total 14 28
145
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture:
14
Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork/Internship:
28
Other: -
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
42
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
1- Identification of the essential fish culture management
2- Encouraging the handling the fish (in – out) in aquatic and exegetic medium
3- Outlying the fish species requirements and characteristics
4- Defining the environmental factors and effected on water ponds
5- How to use the systems to determine water quality.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
Lectures are given using PowerPoint presentation and handouts
Practical studies.
Reports and Oral presentations.
Visiting some fish farm in KSA
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Midterm and final exams
Estimating writing
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
146
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Fish pond types (earthen – concrete – sandy...)
Bring some water from fish farm to determine pH, salinity, ammonia,
nitrite ...etc.
Fish dissection
Handling of fish in the lab and practice of fish dissection
Proper handling of equipments
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Using illustrations materials and power point presentation
Laboratory training on different methods for fish handling and nutrition.
Writing reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Midterm and final exams.
Evaluation of lab reports on operating equipment.
Evaluation of student activities and assignments.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific experiment.
Enable student to discus results of work to classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Close monitoring while performing practical work
Using power point presentation and illustration
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Student cooperation in lab sessions
Evaluation of the obtained results
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to obtain results of practical work.
Ability to be involved in general discussion and suggest solutions for fish
147
biology
Ability to use computers and internet for fish management information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit lab work and written reports
Promoting students to oral presentation
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating of practical studies
Evaluating activities and contribution in general discussion
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Reports - activities homework 3-6-8 10%
2
Midterm Exam. 9 10%
3
Lab. report 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
148
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
The supervision done by the staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
36. Required Text(s)
1– The scientific basis for fish production and welfare (1994) Abdul Hameed, M.A.
Publisher of Egyptian universities, Mansoura, Arab Republic of Egypt.
2- The foundations of aquaculture (1994). Abdel-Fattah, M.A. Kuwait Foundation for
the Advancement of Science, Department of authoring, translation and publishing,
Kuwait
3- Aquaculture (technical and management. (2009). Al-Asga, N.A. and Younis, A. M. -
Department of Animal Science - Faculty of Sciences - King Saud University
4- Parker, R. (2002). Aquaculture Science, 2nd
ed. Delmar, Thomson Learning, USA,
(book) 621 p.
37. Essential References
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Prepared lecture rooms equipped with all materials.
Equipped laboratories with management of fish culture.
2. Computing resources
149
Computer room containing at least 30 systems connected to the internet to
be used by the students
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes – incubators – autoclaves –water baths – Water quality
measurements- fish aquaria safety facilities.
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Course evaluation by students.
Interview of some new students.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the program by the departmental studying plan
committee.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
i. Installation of digital labs and fish culture.
Implementation of the suggestions recommended by specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
When required, reviewing assessments by a special committee from the
department.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of the course and equivalent courses giving in Zoology
departments at local and international universities.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Updating courses with new topics in the field.
Improving the teaching methods for the course using evaluation made by
students.
150
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 373: Terrestrial Ecology
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
151
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Terrestrial Ecology (Zoo 373)
2. Credit hours 1 (1 + 1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Mohamed K. Al-Sadoon
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Fifth level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
General Zoology (Zoo 103 )
25. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
152
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
To let student get acquainted with:
- Principle of ecosystem
- Geographical distribution of animals.
- Ecological factors (physical and biological factors)
- Animal’s communities.
- Elements cycles.
- Adaptation of animals to desert environments.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental studying plans committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with those equivalent courses taught in local
and international universities
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
General Introduction 1 1
Principle of Ecosystem 1 1
Terrestrial communities 1 1
Elements cycles 2 2
Animals communities 1 1
Geographical distribution of Animals. 1 1
Ecological factors. 3 3
Population Ecology 2 2
Adaptation of Animals to desert Environments. 2 2
153
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 14 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 14
Other:
-
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
30
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Student would be able to know methods of studying:
Terrestrial Ecology.
Geographical distribution.
Ecological factors.
Adaptations to Environment.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using PowerPoint presentations and illustrations)
Laboratory practice on ecological methods
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Mid- term and final exams
Evaluation of lab activities
154
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Record and describe Terrestrial habitats.
Search and analyse physiochemical parameters
Use computers for data analysis.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Laboratory training.
Use of power point presentation and illustration.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and results
Evaluation of Activities and assignments
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific task.
Ability to work independently to handle experimental animals.
Ability to present results of work to classmate.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Using power point presentation and ecological illustrations
Close supervision while performing experiments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of student cooperation in lab session
Evaluation of the obtained lab results
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to obtain results of experiments.
Ability to be involved in general discussion and suggest solutions for
155
difficulties.
Ability to computers and internet to search and restore ecological
information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Encouraging students to submit lab and internal activities, oral
presentation and written reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the Field trips written reports
Evaluating activities and assignments
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( activities and homework) 3-6-8 10%
2
Monthly Exam. 9 10%
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5 Final Exam. 15 50%
156
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
38. Required Text(s)
- Ecology. (2000). By Boran
- Trivedi, R. V. 1993
A Textbook of Environmental Science. Anmol Publ., New Delhi.
- Al-Johany, A. M. (1422 H). Practical of Animal ecology.
2. Essential References
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Prepared lecture rooms with audio – visual facilities.
Equipped laboratories.
157
39. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental studying plans
committee
4 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Installation of digital labs
Implementation of suggestions by departmental course committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
158
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 374: Aquatic ecology
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
159
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Aquatic ecology (Zoo 374)
2. Credit hours 2.0 (1 + 1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
7- Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Ali Al-Akel
8- Level/year at which this course is offered
Sixth Level
9- Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
(Zoo 103)
26. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
160
B Objectives:
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
The student would be able to learn about:
Characters of aquatic ecology
Physical and chemical characteristics of the water
Aquatic ecosystem
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental course planning committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments,
slides and new preparations.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with those equivalent courses given in local
and international universities.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contact
hours
The characters of aquatic ecology 1 1
The physical characteristics of the water 2 2
The Chemical characteristics of the water
3 3
The relationship between aquatic animals and aquatic
plants
2 2
The characteristics of some aquatic animals
4 4
161
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 12 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship
24
Other:
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
60
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill.
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
The student would gain knowledge concerning:
Properties of aquatic ecology
Physical characteristics of water (temperature, salinity, turbidity)
Chemical characteristics of water (dissolved oxygen, other dissolved gasses,
pH & hardness)
Aquatic animals and plants
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using PowerPoint presentations and illustrations)
Laboratory practice and microscopic examinations. (Conducting
experiments and writing reports).
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
162
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of lab activities results.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Investigate the aquatic ecology and variation in different water sources
Measure physical and chemical characteristics of the water and their
applications.
Classify aquatic animals.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of microscopic illustrations.
Laboratory training.
Power point presentation
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports about practical session
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific duty.
Ability to work independently to characterize physical and chemical
characteristic of water in different aquatic environment.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Close monitoring while dealing with water in the lab.
Using power point presentation and aquatic illustrations.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of student contribution in lab session.
Evaluation of the obtained lab results.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
163
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to obtain results of practical work.
Ability to be involved in general discussion and suggest solution for
problems faced.
Ability to use computers and internet to searches for aquatic information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit lab and internet activities, homework,
written reports and give oral presentation.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the laboratory written reports and contribution in general
discussion
Evaluating internet activities
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Promoting students to submit lab and internet activities, assignments, and
written reports and give oral presentation.
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group
project, examination etc.) Week due Proportion
of Final Assessment
1
First theoretical exam 6 10%
2
Second theoretical exam 12 10%
3
Lab exam
13 30%
164
4
Final Exam 15 50%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 6 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
40. Required Text(s)
1- Barnes, A. S. Al Mann (edit). 1991). Fundamental of aquatic ecology. Black
well Scientific publication , United Kingdom.
2- Juhani et al (1422 e) The scientific evidence, Animal Ecology, King Saud University
2. Essential References
1- Barnes, A. S. Al Mann (edit). 1991). Fundamental of aquatic ecology. Black
well Scientific publication , United Kingdom.
2- Juhani et al (1422 e) The scientific evidence, Animal Ecology, King Saud University
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
1- Barnes, A. S. Al Mann (edit). 1991). Fundamental of aquatic ecology. Black
well Scientific publication , United Kingdom.
2- Juhani et al (1422 e) The scientific evidence, Animal Ecology, King Saud University
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
165
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Optically and electronically facilitated lecture rooms.
Microscopically equipped laboratories.
41. Computing resources
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialist committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by departmental studying plans
committee.
5 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
j. Installation of modern microscopes and digital labs.
k. Implementation of suggestions recommended by departmental specialist
committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialist
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
166
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 375: Pollution
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
167
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Pollution (Zoo 375)
2. Credit hours 2 (1 + 1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Fahed A. El-Mesned
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Seven level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
General Zoology (Zoo 101 )
27. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
168
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
To let student get acquainted with :
Introduction to pollution and pollutants
Different types of pollution: Water, Air, Soil, Food, Thermal, Noise,
Radiant.
Effects of pollution on animal structure and function.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental planning committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with those equivalent courses given in local
and international universities.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
General Introduction (Ecological pollution) 2 2
Air pollution 2 2
Soil pollution 2 2
Food pollution 2 2
Thermal pollution 2 2
Noise pollution 2 2
Radient pollution 1 1
Water pollution 1 1
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 14 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 14
Other:
-
169
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average :for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
28
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Really methods of studying impact of pollution on environment.
Describe the effects of different types of pollution.
Gain the latest information related to ecological pollution.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In class lecturing (using PowerPoint presentation and illustrations)
Laboratory practice and microscopic examinations. (Conducting
experiments and writing reports).
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
170
Ability to record and describe ecological pollution.
Capability to search and analyse pollution parameters.
Possibility to use computers and internet for analyses of pollution data.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Laboratory training.
Use illustrations and power point presentation
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific job.
Ability to work independently to conduct a specific task.
Ability to communicate results of work to classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Monitoring student activities during practical work.
Using data show
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of student contribution in lab sessions.
Evaluation of lab results obtained.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to collect pollution data.
Ability to be involved in discussion and suggest comments.
Ability to use computers and internet to search and restore information
relevant to ecological pollution.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Encouraging students to submit internet activities and written reports and
give oral presentation.
171
5 Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the field trips written reports
Evaluating the laboratory written reports about various pollutants
Evaluating internet activities and assignments
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( activities and homework) 3-6-8 10%
2
Monthly Exam. 9 10%
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
172
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ Week.
E Learning Resources
42. Required Text(s)
Morgan, M. D., J. M. Moran and J. H. Wiersma 1993 : Environmental Science ,
Managing Physical Resources. Volume III. Wm. C. Brown publishers. Oxford.
2. Essential References
Tessier, A. and R. Turner (1995). Metal speciation and Bioavailabity in
Aquatic system. John Wiley & Sobs, New York.
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
Katyal, T. and M. Satake. 1993. Environmental pollution. Anmol. Publ. NewDelhi.
-
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Lecture rooms provided with new teaching tools.
Equipped laboratories with atomic absorption equipment.
2. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Atomic absorption, microscopes, pH meters, Autoclaves
173
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental studying plan
committee
6 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Installation of digital labs
Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
174
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 381: Economics of Aquaculture
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
175
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Zoo 381: Economics of Aquaculture
2. Credit hours 2.0 (1+1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Bachelor degree in Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Dr. Naser Al-Asgah
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Elective course
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Ichthyology (Zoo 322) and Chordates (Zoo 222)
28. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
176
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
1- The need for fisheries and aquaculture.
2- Essential of aquaculture and food security.
3- Projects planning and economic benefits.
4- The main factors in selection of location of the project.
5- Economic fish species and their tolerance to environmental conditions.
6- Difficulties and future of fish culture in Arab world.
4. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are
being implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material,
changes in content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental studying planning committee.
Updating the course with the latest developments in the field and using
internet materials.
Updating practical sessions with new experiments, microscopic slides and
illustration.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contact
hours
Introduction about economics of aquaculture. 1 2
Economics of catching and fish culture. 1 2
The demand of aquaculture. 1 2
Problems of food security and aquaculture
contributing to dissolve it.
2 4
Planning of aquaculture projects. 1 2
Economic benefit of aquaculture. 1 2
Economic species using in aquaculture. 2 4
Selection of farm site. 1 2
Obstacles of developing fish culture. 1 2
Aquaculture in KSA and Arab countries. 2 4
Suitable times for fish marketing. 1 2
Total 14 28
177
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture:
14
Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork/Internship:
28
Other: -
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
42
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Student would understand methods in:
1- Economic of fish culture
2- Planning to construction fish farm and projects.
3- Fish species requirements, characteristics and their economic value.
4- Environmental factors and their effect on fish culture
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
Lectures are given using PowerPoint and illuatrstions
Practical laboratory sessions
Reports and Oral presentations.
Visiting some fish farm in Saudi Arabia
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Midterm and final exams
Evaluation of Reports.
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
178
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Studies of growth performance on economic fish species.
Economic value of fish culture projects
Fish dissection
Handling of fish in the lab and ability to take some samples to determine
the nutritional values.
Some of mathematic examples.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Using illustrations materials and power point presentations
Laboratory training.
Activities and assignments.
Reports of visiting fish farms.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Midterm and final exams.
Evaluation of lab reports and results.
Evaluation of activities and assignments.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
To be able to work in a team to conduct a specific task.
To be able to discus results of work in groups.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Using power point presentation and illustrations.
Visiting fish farms and write reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Evaluation of student reports on field visits.
Evaluation of laboratory results.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
179
Ability to work in a team and collect specific information.
Ability to write and present reports.
Ability to use computers and internet for research purposes.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Urging students to submit activities and homework
Encouraging students to write and present reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating of practical studies and field trips reports
Evaluating activities and assignments
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Reports - activities homework 3-6-8 10%
2
Midterm Exam. 9 10%
3
Lab. report 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
180
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
The supervision done by the staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
43. Required Text(s)
Mesk, C. (1985). Fish Aquaculture Technology and Experiments. Pergamon Press.
(book), 23p.
Technologies for commercial production of fish (aquaculture, industrial, hatchery
production of fish). 1998. Al-Husseini, O.M. and Abd El Samea, M.A.G. Arab
House for Publishing and Distribution, Cairo, Egypt, Arab Republic.
44. Essential References
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Advanced lecture rooms equipped with audio –visual facilities
Equipped laboratories.
45. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
181
Microscopes – slides – incubators – autoclaves –water baths – Water quality
measurements- fish aquaria safety facilities.
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Course evaluation by students.
Interview of some new students.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme.
6 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
a. Purchasing Modern microscopes.
b. Implementation of the suggestions made by the departmental course
committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
When required, reviewing assessments by a special committee from the
department.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of the course and equivalent courses giving in Zoology
departments at some university.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Updating courses with new topics in the field.
Improving the teaching methods for the course using evaluation made by
students.
182
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 382: Entomofauna of Saudi Arabia
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
183
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to ........ of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Entomofauna of Saudi Arabia (Zoo 382)
2. Credit hours 2.0 (1 +1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Dr. Mohammed S. Al-Khalifa
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Sixth
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Zoo 311
29. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
Not Applicable
184
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
Student should have a clear concept of the following :
Insect Diversity in Arabian Peninsula and adaptation of insects to
dissert life
Collection of Insects from Diversified Location
Methods of Insect Identification and Preservation
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Course Planning Committee reviews the contents of the course annually.
Updating the course with latest research in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments,
slides and new preparations.
Updating the course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with those equivalent courses taught in local
and international universities.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
Biodiversity of Arabian deserts
3 9
Distribution and Biology of Indigenous
Insects in Saudi Arabia
3 9
Insect Collecting Methods 2 6
Methods of Insect Identification 4 12
Insect Preserving Methods 2 6
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 14 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 28
Other:
-
185
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average :for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
30
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned – 2 Exams 2nd
and
4th
Month
-2 Written Papers about the Various Aspects of the Course
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Recognizing insect Biodiversity in Saudi Arabia
Identifying Insect Collection and Insect Preservation
Outlying the Identification of insects
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
Preparing Worksheets for Distribution of Insects
Use of Power Point for presentation in the Lecture.
Question Answer session
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Two seasonal Assessments
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of lab activities and assignments.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Identify and classify common insects.
Ability to collect and preserve the Insects.
Record these information on computer about classification, preservation
and collection.
186
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Practical Observations on the whole Insect Specimens
.
Use of taxonomic illustrations and power point presentations
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports on collecting, classifying of insects
Evaluation of student activities and assignments.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific insect collecting trip.
Ability to work independently to collect, classify insects.
Ability to present results of work to classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Close monitoring while performing practical work (trips)
Using power point presentation and embryonic illustration.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of student contribution in lab sessions.
Evaluation of the obtained lab results
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Work in a team to conduct a specific project.
Ability to be involved in general discussion.
Ability to computers and internet to search and restore the embryonic
information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit lab and internet activities, homework and
written reports and give oral presentation.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills Group
187
Discussion
Evaluating the laboratory written reports and contribution in general
discussion
Evaluating internet activities and assignments
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not Applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not Applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not Applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( activities and homework) 3-6-8 10%
2
Monthly Exam. 9 10%
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5 Final Exam. 15 50%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
188
E Learning Resources
46. Required Text(s)
- Elzinga , Richard, S. (1997) Fundamentals of Entomology 4th
eds. Prentice Hall,
Upper Saddle River, New Jersey 07458
- Upton, M. S. (1991). Methods for Collecting, Preserving and Studying Insects
and Allied Form CSIRO Division of Entomology, Australia.
2. Essential References
Richards, O. W. and R. G. Davies (1977) Imm's General Text Book of
Entomology, 10th
ed. Land Chapman & Hall.
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Smart lecture rooms.
Equipped laboratories.
47. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes – Whole Insect Specimens, Insect Nets, Killing Jars, Aspirators,
Spreading Board, Insect Box, safety Facilities.
189
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental studying plan
committee
7 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
a. Installation of modern microscopes and digital labs
b. Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
190
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 412: Parasite Immunology
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
191
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Zoo 412, Parasite Immunology
2. Credit hours 2.0 (1 + 1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology Program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Gamal Badr
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Sixth level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Cell Physiology (Zoo 212)
30. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
192
B. Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
Basic biology of Parasitology
To learn Innate and Adaptive Immunity
Immunological aspects of certain endemic parasites in KSA and the way in
which the immune response can mediate failure or success.
Laboratory assays for antigen preparation and serological diagnosis.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental course planning committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments, slides
and new preparations.
Updating course materials using state of the art research findings.
Tune-up the course contents in proportion with equivalent local and
international courses taught in various universities.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contact
hours
Overview of the course and definition of Parasitology
and its history
1 2
Type of parasites infecting human and mode of
infection
1 2
Introduction to Innate and Adaptive Immunity 1 2
Phagocytosis and its role in parasite elimination 1 2
Parasites infecting the phagocytes 1 2
Role of complement system in immune response against
parasite
1 2
Role of antigen presenting cells in processing parasite
antigens
1 2
Immune responses against certain endemic Parasites in
KAS
1 2
Types of immune response against parasite antigens 1 2
Laboratory assays for antigen preparation 1 2
193
Serological diagnosis for parasite infection 1 2
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 11 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 22
Other:
-
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
45
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Knowledge of basic Parasitology.
Identification of the mode of parasite infection.
Knowledge of phases of immune responses against parasite.
The role of adaptive immunity for the parasite infection elimination.
Parasites infecting phagocytes.
Parasite that are widely spread in KSA and their mode of infection.
Knowledge of parasite antigen recognition and presentation.
Determining serological diagnosis of parasite infection
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
Focus to attract and interact with the students, via brief review to previous
lecture topics and how it relates to present lecture topic.
Brief discussion and presentation, using power point presentation, for the
194
lecture objectives
Power point presentation for the remaining of the detailed lecture topics
Lecture contents are presented in combination with discussion with the
students via giving daily life analogy examples to simplify and illustrate
complicated concepts
Final brief review using quick and direct questions to students relate to the
lecture topics.
Brief independent assignments and quizzes are given to students at the
beginning of selected lecture
Group learning discussion in order to homogenise class performance
Laboratory practice that include microscope examination and conducting
experiments and writing reports
Projects, activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Med-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of project, activities and assignments
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Recognize and differentiate between the different of immune cells in the
blood
Separate (adherence, density gradient, cell organelles, gravity)
mononuclear leucocytes from peripheral blood by Ficoll.
Perform phagocytosis of bacteria in vitro and in vivo.
Perform analysis of blood and stool parasites.
Skills to perform antigen-antibody fixation.
Skills to perform complement fixation.
Skills to perform immunoelectrophoresis.
Diagnose the parasite infection
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of illustrations and schematic diagrams.
Laboratory practice and microscopic examinations.
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Biweekly quizzes.
Med-term and final exams.
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations.
Evaluation of projects and activities.
195
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific immunoparasiotlogical
point
Ability to work independently to conduct a specific project
Ability to discuss results of work to classmates
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Work independently.
Using power point presentation and embryonic illustration.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of group projects.
Evaluation of projects conducted individually.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to collect data of a specific project.
Ability to solve educational situation problems.
Ability to computers and internet to search and restore information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit activities, homework and writen reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluation of the laboratory’s written reports
Evaluation of projects and assignments
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
196
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( activities and homework) 3-6-8 5%
2
Med-term Exam. 9 15%
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
48. Required Text(s)-
Maher al-bassiony Hossen (2005) Immunology (required)
2. Essential References
Kenneth and Hunter (19982) Immunoparasitology (Optional)
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
197
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Modern lecture rooms
Equipped laboratories
49. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes – electron microscope – slides – incubators – autoclaves – titration
equipment –water baths – digital lab. - safety and disinfection control
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students
Students- faculty meetings
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental specialised
committee.
8 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
a. Installation of modern microscopes and digital labs
b. Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
198
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 413: Entomology and Environment-Health
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
199
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to ........ of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Entomology and Environment-Health (Zoo 413)
2. Credit hours 2.0 (1 +1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Dr. Mohammed S. Al-Khalifa
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Seventh
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Zoo 311
31. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
Not Applicable
200
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
Student should have a clear concept of the following :
Impact of Fascinating World of Insects and their effect on Human
Health and Environment
Beneficial and insect pests of stored product Harmful Insects
Range of Insect activity and their distribution (terrestrial and aquatic
insects)
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Course Planning Committee reviews the contents of the course annually.
Updating the course with latest research in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments,
slides and new preparations.
Updating courses resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with those equivalent courses in local and
international universities.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
Impact of Insects on Human Health 2 6
Insects and Environment 3 9
Beneficial Insects 3 9
Harmful Insects 3 9
Insect Activities and Distribution 3 9
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 14 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 28
Other:
-
201
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
30
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned. – Exams 2nd
and
4th
Month
- Written Papers about the Various Aspects of the Course
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Defining Insect Behaviour
Recognizing Insect Distribution
Identifying effects of insects on human, animal health and plant production
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
Preparing Worksheets for Distribution of Insects
Use of Power Point for presentation and illustration in the Lecture.
Question and Answer session.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Written and oral exams
Evaluation of lab reports
Evaluation of lab activities and results
202
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Ability to identify and classify common insects.
Ability to Observe the Insect behaviour.
Ability to quantify the positive and negative effect of insects on human,
animal health and plant production
Use computers and internet to search for recent information about insect
control
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of Whole Insect Specimens
Practical Observations on the Insects.
Field Observations
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports on operating equipment for field trips
Evaluation of student activities and assignments.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct specific experimental field trips.
Ability to work independently to deal with insect control.
Ability to present results of work to classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Close monitoring while performing filed work
Using power point presentation and illustration.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of student contribution in lab sessions.
Assessment of projects conducted individually.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
203
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to examine and analyse embryonic slides
Ability to be involved in general discussion.
Ability to computers and internet to search and restore the embryonic
information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit activities, homework and writing reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills Group
Discussion
Evaluating the laboratory written reports and contribution in general
discussion
Evaluating lab activities and results
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not Applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not Applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not Applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activities ( activities and homework) 3-6-8 10%
2
Monthly Exam. 9 10%
204
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
50. Required Text(s)
- Walker, Alan (1994). The Arthropods of Human and Domestic Animals.
Chapman & Hall.
- Soulsby, E. J. L. (1982) Helminths, Arthropods and Protozoa of Domesticated
Animals Baillier Tindall.
- Upton, M. S. (1991). Methods for Collecting, Preserving and Studying Insects
and Allied Form CSIRO Division of Entomology, Australia.
2. Essential References
Richards, O. W. and R. G. Davies (1977) Imm's General Text Book of
Entomology, 10th
ed. Land Chapman & Hall.
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
Fauna of Arabia. Vol. 1-24.
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
Websites on the internet that are relevant to the topics of the course
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
205
Smart lecture rooms.
Equipped laboratories.
51. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes – Whole Insect Specimens, Insect Nets, Killing Jars, Aspirators,
Spreading Board, Insect Box, safety Facilities.
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental studying plan
committee.
9 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
a. Installation of modern microscopes and digital labs
b. Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
206
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 420: Comparative Vertebrates Anatomy
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
207
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Comparative Vertebrates Anatomy (Zoo 420)
2. Credit hours 2 (1+1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. MOHAMED A. AL-DAKHIL
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Seventh level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
(Zoo 482)
7. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
208
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
Historical background on development of the Anatomy .
Observing the evolution of vertebrate organs through selective
vertebrates.
Method of studying Comparative anatomy .
Comparing three body systems of vertebrates as training to understand
comparative vertebrate anatomy.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental studying plan committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments,
slides and new preparations.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with those equivalent courses caught in local
and international universities.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
What is anatomy 1 1
What is Comparative anatomy 1 1
Historical brief 1 1
Anatomical terms 1 1
Method of studying Comparative Vertebrates Anatomy 1 1
Skin System 5 5
Skeletal System 3 3
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 13 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 13
Other:
209
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
26
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Outline histology of Anatomy
Recognise different anatomical features of vertebrates
Determine methods of differentially between vertebrates based on
anatomy.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
Student would be able to:
In-class lecturing (using PowerPoint presentation and illustrations)
Laboratory practice and microscope examination.
Activities and assignments
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
b. Cognitive Skills
210
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Ability to use the microscope to examine histological slides.
Ability to recognise different parts of the body and compare
them in different vertebrates.
Classify vertebrates on the basis of anatomical features.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of power point presentation and anatomical illustration.
Training in dissection and examination of various tissues.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and findings
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to collect specific information.
Ability to work independently to dissect animals and study organs.
Ability to present results of work to classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Using power point presentation and anatomical illustrations
Observe student during discussion sessions.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of student performance in lab sessions.
Evaluation of results obtained
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to record observation on anatomical features.
Ability to discuss finding and suggest logical methods to solve difficulties..
Using computers and internet for research purposes.
211
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Urging students to submit activities, assignments and writing reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the laboratory written reports
Evaluating activities and assignments
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activities ( activities and homework) 3-6-8 5%
2
Weekly Exam. 10 weekly exams
30%
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 20%
5
Final Exam. 15 40%
212
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
- Al
Dakhil, M. A. 2009. Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy. Lecture notes.
Zoology department, College of Science KSU.
-
Kardong, K.V. 2001. Vertebrates-Comparative Anatomy, Function,
Evolution, 3rd
ed., Dubuque, IA: W.C. Brown.
Kluge, A.G.,et al.1977. Chordate Structure & Function, 2nd
ed., New
York: Macmillan Publishing Company.
-
Romer, A.S., & T.S. Parsons. 1986. The Vertebrate Body, 6th
ed.,
Philadelphia, PA: Saunders College Publishing.
-
Walker, W.F. 1987. Functional Anatomy of the Vertebrates. An
Evolutionary Perspective, 1st ed., Philadelphia, PA: Saunders College
Publishing.
-
Weichert, C.K.1970. Anatomy of the Chordates. 4th
ed., McGraw Hill
Kogakusha,Ltd.
E Learning Resources
1. Required Text(s)
-
2. Essential References
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
213
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Lecture rooms provided with audio – visual aids
Equipped laboratories.
2. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes – electron microscope – histological sections – incubators – digital
lab. – safety facilities
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental course committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the department.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Installation of microscopes and digital labs.
Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
214
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 423: Principles of Descriptive Embryology
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
215
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Principles of Descriptive Embryology (Zoo 423)
2. Credit hours 2(1+1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Othman Aldokhi
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Seventh level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Zoo 103
8. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
216
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
To acquire students with basic knowledge of Embryology and stages of
development of the embryo.
To enable students to distinguish between different stages of embryological
process.
To enable students to determine various structures and their changes through
development.
To enable students to understand patterns of genetic layers and their
contribution in development of organs.
To provide students with knowledge regarding latest developments in
vertebrates embryology.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental course planning committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments,
slides and new preparations.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with those equivalent courses given in local
and international institutions.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
Introduction of Embryology, Terms and concepts.
Primordial Germ cells.
Gonads early formation.
1 2
Gametogenesis. Spermatogenesis and Spermiogenesis. 1 2
Oogenesis. 1 2
Hormonal control of Gametogenesis. 1 2
Fertlization. 1 2
217
Cleavage. Patterns of cleavage, Cleavage pattern in
some vertebrates.
1 2
Gastrulation, Formation of the genetic layers.
Gastrulation pattern in some vertebrates.
1 2
Organogenesis. The generation of Ectodermal,
mesodermal and Endodermal Organ rudiments.
Examples of some organs developmental process.
1 2
Cellular basis of Morphogenesis
Morphogenesis of 3 and 10mm frog embryo.
1 2
Organs Formed by The Ectoderm Layer:
Neural System.
1 2
Pituitary Gland
Sense Organs (The Eye).
1 2
Organs Formed by The Mesoderm Layer:
Urinary and Genital System
1 2
Circular and Vascular System. 1 2
Organs Formed by The Endoderm Layer:
Digestive System.
1 2
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 14 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 14
Other:
-
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average :for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
14
218
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
The student would be able to gain knowledge about:
Properties and structure of Gametogenesis. Spermatogenesis and
Spermiogenesis and Oogenesis.
Types and classification of eggs in vertebrates.
Hormonal control of gametogenesis.
Uunderstand Cleavage. Patterns of cleavage, Cleavage pattern in some
vertebrates.
Regarding Gastrulation, formation of the genetic layers. Gastrulation
pattern in some vertebrates and Organogenesis.
latest developments in vertebrates embryology.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using PowerPoint presentation and illustrations)
Laboratory practice and microscopic examination. (Conducting
experiments and writing reports).
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of lab activities and results.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Examining and describing karyotypes.
219
Preparing slides and samples.
Preparing lab solutions and reagents.
Use computers and internet to search for embryonic.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of power point presentation and embryonic
Experimental laboratory training.
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific embryonic investigating
point.
Ability to work independently to implement embryonic experiment.
Ability to communicate results of work to classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Close monitoring while performing embryonic examination and
experimentation
Using power point presentation and embryonic illustration.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of student contribution in lab sessions.
Evaluation of the obtained lab results
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to examine and analyse embryonic slides.
Ability to be involved in general discussion.
Ability to computers and internet to search and restore the embryonic
information.
220
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit lab and internet activities, homework and
written reports and give oral presentation.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the laboratory written reports and contribution in general
discussion
Evaluating internet activities and assignments
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( activities and homework) 3-6-8 10%
2
Monthly Exam. 9 10%
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
221
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
3. Required Text(s)
1- Comparative Embryology. By Prof. Saleh Kuraim,and Dr. F. Alqdsy. King
Abdulaziz university press.
2- Essential Lab book of Vertebrates Embryology. Prof. Ahmad Alhumaidi and
Prof Othman Aldokhi and Mr. Mohammad Algandour.
2. Essential References
Essential of Vertebrates Embryology. Dr. Maher Ibrahim. King Saud Press.
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
Developmental Biology "by Scott F. Gilbert 2003 7th
ed .Sinauer Association Inc.
Sunderland Massachusetts's.
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Smart lecture rooms.
Equipped laboratories.
4. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
222
Microscopes – electron microscope – slides – incubators – autoclaves – titration
equipment – measuring equipment –water baths – digital lab. - safety facilities
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental studing plan
committee.
10 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
a. Installation of modern microscopes and digital labs
b. Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
223
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Principle of Experimental Embryology (Zoo 424)
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
224
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Principle of Experimental Embryology (Zoo 424)
2. Credit hours 2.0 (1+1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Alhimaidi Ahmed R.
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Eighth level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Principle of Vertebrate Descriptive Embryology (Zoo 423)
9. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
225
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
To acquire students with basic knowledge of properties experimental
embryology and the experiment that leads the understanding determination
embryonic organizer, embryonic inductions and differentiation.
Understand some of the applied experiment like, artificial insemination (AI)
baby test tube (IVF), chimera, and Cloning.
To enable students to construct the teratology methodology.
Ddetermine the tissue and embryo cultures.
Obtaining knowledge regarding the cryo preservation
Describing the stem cells types and its applications.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (Eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field).
Updating the student by our web site on www.ksu.edu.sa/faculty of science
Annual review of course by departmental course planning committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments,
slides and new preparations.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with those equivalent courses given in local
and international institutions.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
Introduction and history of experimental embryology 1 1
Differentiation embryonic organizer and embryonic
induction
3 3
Cancer and embryo cells 1 1
Embryo Teratology and its causes 1 1
Parthenogenesis 1 1
Some applied experimental embryology ,Baby test tube
(IVF), Identical twin production, cloning, ,Chimera
,Gametes and embryo Cry preservation ,stem cell
application
Cloning
Chimera
2 2
226
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 14 Tutorial:
term paper
presentation
Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 28
Other:
mid term &final
exam
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Identifying properties and embryo cell determination and differentiation
Determining teratology and the sensitive period of embryo development.
Uunderstanding the differences of cancer cells, embryo cell and
parthenogenesis.
Recalling the latest developments in baby test tube IVF, ICSI and
application.
Defining the chimera, cloning, stem cell and crayo preservation
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using Power Point presentation and illustrations).
Laboratory practice and microscope examination. (Conducting
experiments and writing reports).
Visiting some IVF unit at the hospital or Genomic bank or applied
experiments in the College of Food and Agriculture Sci.
227
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Written and oral periodical and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Estimation of activities
b. Cognitive Skills
(I) Cognitive skills to be developed
Examining and describing embryo development.
Preparing slides and samples of embryo
Preparing lab in vitro fertilization.
Evaluating embryo abnormalities.
Use computers and internet to search for the latest information in
experimental embryology.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of power point presentation and embryonic
Experimental laboratory training.
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(I) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific experiment.
Ability to work independently to deal with stem cell and their applications.
Ability to present results of work to classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Close monitoring while performing embryonic examination and
experimentation
Using power point presentation and embryonic illustration.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
228
Assessment of student contribution in lab sessions.
Evaluation of the obtained lab results
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(I) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to obtain results of practical work.
Ability to be involved in general discussion.
Ability to computers and internet to search and restore the embryonic
information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit lab and internet activities, homework and
written reports and give oral presentation.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the laboratory written reports and contribution in general
discussion
Evaluating internet activities and assignments
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
229
1
Class activates (term paper preparation ) 3-6-8-13 10%
2
Midterm Exam. 7 10%
3 Lab. Reports 3-12 10% 4
Lab. Exam. 14 20%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
5. Required Text(s)
Experimental embryology (2009): by Alhimaidi Ahmed, Alkrim Saleh.and Alshawa
Yasre. King Saud University press.( in Arabic) -
Introduction in descriptive and experimental embryology by Saleh Krim A. Almujtma
press.(in Arabic).
2. Essential References
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
- Development Biology Gilbert 7th
. ed.
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e.
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
230
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Smart lecture rooms.
Equipped laboratories with experimental embryology.
6. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes (inverted) – slides – incubators – autoclaves – titration equipment –
tissue culture units –water baths – digital lab. - Safety facilities.
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental studying plan
committee.
11 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
a. Installation of modern microscopes and digital labs
b. Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
231
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 425: Economic Fishes and crustaceans
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
232
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Economic Fishes and crustaceans (Zoo 425)
2. Credit hours 2.0 (1+1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Bachelor degree in Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Dr. Naser Al-Asgah
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Eight level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Ichthyology (Zoo 320)
10. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
233
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
Basics of fish and crustacean biology.
Characteristics of fishes and crustaceans cultured in KSA.
Basics of aquaculture.
Reproduction and life cycle of selected fishes
Economic fishes and crustacean
5. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are
being implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material,
changes in content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental study plan committee.
Updating the course with the latest developments in the field and using
internet materials.
Updating practical sessions with new experiments and slides.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contact
hours
Introduction of fish and crustacean 1
Fresh, marine and brackish water fish 2
Important fish that can hatching and culture
in KSA
2
Breeding and life cycle for selective fish 2
Breeding and life cycle for selective
crustaceans
2
General basics of breeding fishes and
crustacean
2
Stages of aquaculture 2
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture:
28
Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork/Internship:
28
Other: -
234
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
45
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
- Understanding basics of fish Biology and crustaceans.
-Define characteristics of fishes and crustaceans cultured in KSA.
-Determine general basics of aquaculture.
-Recognize economic fishes and crustacean.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
Lectures are given using PowerPoint presentation and illustrations
Practical studies.
Reports and Oral presentations.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Midterm and final exams
Evaluation of Reports.
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Ability to recognising different fish species.
235
Laboratory samples of fish aquaria.
Knowledge of lab equipments requirements for fish culture
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Using illustrations
Laboratory training.
Activities and reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Midterm and final exams.
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations.
Evaluation of of activities
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
To be able to work in a team to collect specific information
To be able to discuss results of work in groups.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Use of power point presentation and embryonic
Experimental laboratory training.
Watching student in the practical classes
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of student contribution in lab
Evaluation of the obtained lab results
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to collect information and present such
information.
Ability to use computers and internet for research purposes.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Encouraging students to submit activities and assignments
236
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating of practical studies carried out by students
Evaluating activities and assignments
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Reports - activities homework 3-6-8 10%
2
Midterm Exam. 9 10%
3
Lab. report 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
The supervision done by the staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
237
E Learning Resources
1. Required Text(s)
- Huet, M. (1972). Textbook of fish culture, Breeding and Cultivation of fish. Fishing
News (book). Ltd.
- The scientific basis and practical breeding and care of fish and crustaceans in the
Arab World, Part I, Part II. (1996). Branih, A.A., Al-Jamal, A.A., Issa, M.A.,
Osman, M.F., Sadek, S.S. Arab House for Publishing and Distribution, Cairo, Egypt
Arabic.
2. Essential References
Bone et al., (1999). Biology of fishes (2nd
edition). Stanley Thornes (Publisher).
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Modern lecture rooms equipped with audio – visual facilities.
Advanced laboratories.
7. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes – slides – incubators – autoclaves –water baths – Water quality
measurements- fish aquaria safety facilities.
238
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Course evaluation by students.
Interview of some new students.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme.
12 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
a. Installation of modern microscopes and digital labs
b. Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
When required, reviewing assessments by a special committee from the
department.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of the course and equivalent courses giving in Zoology
departments at some university.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Updating courses with new topics in the field.
Improving the teaching methods for the course using evaluation made by
students.
239
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 432: Endocrinology
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
240
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2 Internal
Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Endocrinology (Zoo 432)
2. Credit hours: 2.0
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course: Prof. Dr. Ibrahim M.
Alhazza
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: Seventh level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any) (Zoo 332)
Co-requisites for this course (if any) None
8. Location if not on main campus
241
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
To acquire students with basic knowledge of properties and structure of
hormones.
To enable students to understand the hormones synthesis
To enable students to measure hormones.
To enable students to determine hormonal impact and syndromes.
To enable students to understand patterns of gland tissues.
To acquire students with knowledge regarding receptors analysis.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental course planning committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments, and
current techniques.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with those equivalent courses given in local
and international institutions.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
Introduction to Endocrinology.
The Vertebrate Endocrine System. 1 1
General Mechanisms of Hormone Action
Endocrine Methodologies. 1 1
Effects of Interaction between hormones and receptors 1 1
The Endocrine Hypothalamus.
Neurohypophysial Hormones. 1 1
Pituitary Hormones,Thyroid and parathyroids
hormones and their effects 2 2
Effects of adrenal gland hormones. 2 2
Growth Hormones.
Hormones of gastrointestinal tract 1 1
Hormonal control of glucose
metabolism,electroletes,osmolality and
thermoregulation
2 2
242
Endocrinology of Sex Differentiation and Development.
Hormones and Male or female Reproductive
Physiology.
Endocrinology of Pregnancy, Parturition and
Lactation.
2 2
Interaction between nervous and endocrine system 1 1
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture:
14
Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork/Interns
hip:
28
Other:
-
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
45
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired:
Identifying the properties and structure of hormones.
understanding hormones synthesis
Defining advanced and ordinary analysis of hormones.
Recalling hormonal impact and syndromes.
Understanding patterns of gland tissues.
Outlying recent information in endocrinology and its application.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
243
In-class lecturing (using PowerPoint presentation and illustrations)
Laboratory practice and microscope examination. (Conducting
experiments and writing reports).
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Estimation of activities and results.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Examine and describe glands.
Prepare slides and samples and lab solutions.
Use computers and internet to search for the latest information in
endocrinology and its applications.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of gland illustrations and power point presentation
Laboratory training on different hormone analysis techniques.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports
Evaluation of student activities and assignments.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific experiment.
Ability to work independently to deal with hormone analysis.
Ability to present results of work to classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Close monitoring while performing practical work
Using power point presentation and gland illustration.
244
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of group projects. Assessment of projects conducted individually.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to obtain results of practical work.
Ability to be involved in general discussion.
Ability to computers and internet to search and restore the embryonic
information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit activities, homework and writing reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the laboratory written reports and contribution in general
discussion
Evaluating activities and results
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills: Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills: Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( Activities and Quizzes) 3-6-8 10%
2 Monthly Exam. 9 10%
245
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
8
Total 100%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 6 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
8. Required Text(s)
Endocrinology (6th
edition) by Mac E. Hadley, Prentice-Hall, New Jersey (2007).
2. Essential References
Comparative Vertebrate Endocrinology, by Bentley, Cambridge Univ. Press.
Cambridge. (2000).
Textbook of Endocrine Physiology, by Griffin, Oxford University Press (2004).
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
ESSENTIAL ENDOCRINOLOGY, BROOK AND MARSHALL, BLACKWELL
SCIENCE, OXFORD. (1996)
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
http://faculty.ksu.edu.sa/alhazza/default.aspx
and websites on the internet that are relevant to the topics of the course:
http://www.vivo.colostate.edu/hbooks/pathphys/endocrine/basics/index.html
http://www.emc.maricopa.edu/faculty/farabee/BIOBK/BioBookENDOCR.html
http://www.hormone.org/endo101/ 5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
246
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Advanced lecture rooms.
Equipped laboratories.
9. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes- slides – Hormones analysis Kits- incubators – autoclaves – titration
equipment – medgering equipments –water baths – digital lab. - safety facilities.
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental studying plan
committee.
13 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
a. Installation of digital labs and hormone analysis methodology
b. Implementation of suggestions administration
c. Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
247
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 433: Immunology
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
248
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Zoo 433, Immunology
2. Credit hours 2.0 (1 + 1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology Program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Gamal Badr
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Sixth level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Cell Physiology (Zoo 332)
11. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
249
B. Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
To learn the history of immunology
To learn the structure of the immune system
To be able to distinguish between innate and acquired immunity (Humoral &
Cellular).
To learn the differences between active, passive and adoptive immune
vaccination.
To be familiar with the antigen processing and presentation, Complement
system, Antibodies and Antigens
To be familiar with hypersensitivity responses, immune deficiencies and
autoimmunity.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental course planning committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments, slides
and new preparations.
Updating course materials using state of the art research findings.
Tune-up the course contents in proportion with equivalent local and
international courses.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contact
hours
Overview of the course and definition of immunology,
Innate and acquired Immunity, Components of the
immune system
1 2
Origin, development and differentiation of immune
cells
1 2
Innate immunity receptors and cytokines secretion 1 2
Phagocytosis and antigens recognition 1 2
Complement activity pathways 1 2
250
Immunogens and Antigens 1 2
Antibody Classes, Functions and regulation of their
production.
1 2
Molecular and genetic basis for antibody diversity
1 2
MHC Molecules Variability of MHC Genes & Products 1 2
Biology of T and B cells Differentiation and their
receptor.
1 2
Immunodeficiency diseases, Allergy, Transplantation
and Grafts, Blood Transfusion
1 2
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 11 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 22
Other:
-
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
45
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
The student would be able to know the following:
Functional anatomy of lymphoid tissues.
Cardinal features of immune responses.
251
Phases of immune responses.
Clonal selection hypothesis and programmed cell death.
Mononuclear phagocytes.
Lymphocyte development and heterogeneity.
Antigen recognition, presentation and molecular structure of antibody.
Leucocyte receptors for antibodies.
Allergy, autoimmunity, blood transfusion and organ transplantation.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
Focus to attract and interact with the students, via brief review to previous
lecture topics and how it relates to present lecture topic.
Brief discussion and presentation, using power point presentation, for the
lecture objectives
Power point presentation for the remaining of the detailed lecture topics
Lecture contents are presented in combination with discussion with the
students via giving daily life analogy examples to simplify and illustrate
complicated concepts
Final brief review using quick and direct questions to students relate to the
lecture topics.
Brief independent assignments and quizzes are given to students at the
beginning of selected lecture
Group learning discission in order to homogenise class performance
Laboratory practice that include microscope examination and conducting
experiments and writing reports
Projects, activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Med-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of project, activities and assignments
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Recognize and differentiate between the structure of immune cells
(neutrophils, Eosinophil, basophil, monocyte, and lymphocyte).
Separate (adherence, density gradient, cell organells, gravity) mononuclear
leucocytes from peripheral blood.
Perform phagocytosis in vitro and in vivo.
252
Perform blood group system.
Conduct complement fixation.
Perform antibody-antigen binding (Ag-Ig affinity test).
Perform immunoelectrophoresis.
Recognize ultrastructure changes in lymphoid organs during the active
phase of the immune response.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of illustrations and schematic diagrams relevant to immune system.
Laboratory practice and training.
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Biweekly quizzes.
Mid-term and final exams.
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations.
Evaluation of student projects and activities.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific immune research point
Ability to work independently to characterize components of the immune
system
Ability to discuss results of work with others
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Using power point presentation and immune system illustrations.
Lose supervision while performing lab work
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Student contribution in lab sessions
Evaluation of the obtained results in the lab
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
253
Ability to work in a team to examine and analyse lab work.
Ability to solve educational situation problems.
Ability to computers and internet to search and restore the immunological
information.
(iii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Urging students to submit activities, homework and written reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluation of the laboratory’s written reports
Evaluation of projects and assignments.
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( activities and homework) 3-6-8 5%
2
Med-term Exam. 9 15%
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
254
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
10. Required Text(s)-
Maher al-bassiony Hossen (2003) Immunology (required)
2. Essential References
Khalefah Ahmad Khalefah (1990). Basic Immunology (Optional)
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
Hyde, R. M. (1995) Immunology 3rd
ed.
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Smart lecture rooms
Equipped laboratories
11. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes – incubators – autoclaves – titration equipment – measuring
equipments –water baths - safety and disinfection control
255
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students
Students- faculty meetings
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental studying plan
committee.
14 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
a. Installation of modern microscopes and digital labs
b. Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
256
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 434: Renal physiology
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
257
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Renal Physiology (Zoo 434)
2. Credit hours 2 (1 + 1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Bachelor degree in Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Saleh Alwasel
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Elective course
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Zoo 332
12. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
258
B Objectives
The primary reason for teaching Renal Physiology is to increase the student’s
knowledge of the kidneys structure and its role in waist elimination and body ions-fluid
balance. Therefore, upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able
to:
• Understand and use a vocabulary of scientific terminology used in Renal
physiology;
• Demonstrate an understanding of compatibility between Renal structure and its
functions in mammals.
• Demonstrate an understanding of: Renal blood flow and body fluid regulation,
filtration, secretion and reabsorption.
• Demonstrate an understanding of: renal response to changes in food and fluid
intake, in addition to be able to explain renal dysfunctions.
6. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are
being implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material,
changes in content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental course planning committee.
Updating the course with the latest developments in the field and using
internet materials.
Updating practical sessions with new experiments and slides.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
259
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contact
hours
Urinary system – An overview of various organs
The structure, organization and function of the urinary system.
Kidney – An overview : structure and function:
Renal histology. Renal blood system. Nephron structure.
Glomerulus and glomerular filtration rate (GFR)
Glomerular filtration and its measurement. Renal blood flow.
Hormonal regulation of GFR. Juxta-glomerular apparatus.
Renal tubule:
Renal tubule segments. Transport sites in the kidney, basic
principles, absorption and secretion. Mechanism of Na+, K
+
and HCO3- transport, Water movement. Glucose transport.
Disorders of tubular transport.
Concentrating and Diluting Mechanisms
The loop of Henle and the counter-current multiplier. Diluting
and concentrating – the role of ADH. Factors affecting the
concentrating ability of the kidney e.g. ADH, long and short
loops.
Electrolyte and Water balance
The control of extracellular fluid volume e.g. thirsts. The
hormonal regulation e.g. the aldosterone, renin-angiotensin
pathways. Osmotic diuretics and clinically used diuretics.
Renal diseases
Abnormal structure. Abnormal gene expression. Kidney
failure. Renal transplantation.
1
1
2
3
3
2
2
1
1
2
3
3
2
2
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture:
14
Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork/Interns
hip: 28
Other: -
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week) 40
260
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
On completion of the unit, students will:
Appreciate the role of the kidney in maintaining salt and water balance.
Describe ion transport processes in different segments of the renal tubule.
Be aware of how these processes can be studied using molecular and cellular
methods.
describe the fine structure and function of the nephron
use analytic thinking to explain abnormal rend structure and pathogenic
demonstrate the ability to explain urine formation in normal and abnormal
condition
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
Lectures are given using PowerPoint and handouts
Group-based discussion.
Course work
Group reports and individual assignments
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Written exams
Practical exam.
Assignments
Discussion
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Examine kidney anatomy.
Examine and describe Kidney's parts.
Analyse renal functions.
Use computers and internet to research for recent renal structure and
function related information.
261
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Using illustrations materials
Laboratory training.
Activities and assignments.
Discussion
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Midterm and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and assignments
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
To be able to work alone
To be able to work in a team to conduct a specific experiment.
To be able to discus results of work to classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Close monitoring while performing practical work
Using power point presentation and illustration.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of student work in group.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work alone or in a team.
Ability to search and discuss.
Ability to use computers and internet.
Ability to reach the information needed using the net
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit activities and written report
Discussion
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluation of the student's ability to discuss and to draw conclusions
Evaluating the activities
262
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Assignments 5 5%
2
Written exam (1) 7.5 7.5%
3
Written exam (2) 7.5 7.5%
4
Lab. Exam. 30 30%
4 Final Exam. 50 50%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
The supervision done by the staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 8 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
12. Required Text(s)
Guyton, A. C., & Hall, J. E. (2002). Human physiology and mechanisms of disease (6th
ed.).Philadelphia: Saunders.
263
Al-Khalifa, M.S. General Physiology. King Saud University
13. Essential References
2. Campbell and Reece Text book of BIOLOGY. Pearson Education, Inc. San
Francisco
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Modern lecture rooms equipped with all materials.
Modern laboratories.
14. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Metabolisim cages. Renal function kits. Renal sections for Light microscope.
Safety facilities
264
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Course evaluation by students and other staff.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme.
7 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Purchasing required equipments for general physiology.
Implementation of the suggestions made by the departmental specialised
committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
When required, reviewing assessments by a special committee from the
department.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of the course and equivalent courses giving in other
universities.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Updating courses with new topics in the field.
Improving the teaching methods for the course using evaluation made by
students.
265
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 435: Neurophysiology
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
266
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2 Internal
Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Neurophysiology (Zoo 435)
2. Credit hours 2.0
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered. (If general elective available in many programs
indicate this rather than list programs) Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course: Prof. Ibrahim M. Alhazza
5. Level/year at which this course is offered: Seventh level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any): (Zoo 332)
Co-requisites for this course (if any): None
7. Location if not on main campus
267
B. Objectives 1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
To acquire students with basic knowledge of
properties and structure of nervous system
Understand the function of nerve cell and of synapse
Know the types of sensory cells and the drug effects.
The relation between endocrine and nervous systems.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in content as
a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental studying planning committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments, slides and
new preparations.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with those equivalent courses given in local and
international institutions.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contact
hours
Introduction to nervous system. 2 2
The function of the neuron 2 2
Basic functions of synapses and transmitters substances 2 2
Action potential and electrical events during nervous
excitation
2 2
The reflex arc 1 1
Some special characteristics of synaptic transmission 1 1
Sensory receptors. Sense of vision. 2 2
Drug effects on nervous system. 1 1
Interaction between nervous system and endocrine system 1 1
2. Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 14 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork/Internship: 28 Other:-
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week):
268
45
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired:
Properties and structure of nervous system
Understand the function of nerve cells and synapse.
Knowledge to know the types of sensory cells.
Understand the drug effects on nerve cells.
Identify the relation between endocrine and nervous systems.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using Power Point presentation and illustrations)
Laboratory practice and microscope examination. (Conducting
experiments and writing reports).
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Use of power point presentation and illustration
Laboratory training
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Examine and describe the nervous system
Prepare slides and samples and lab solutions.
Search and analyse neurotransmitters
Use computers and internet for recent information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of slid illustrations
269
Laboratory training.
Activities and homework.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of student activities and assignments.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific task.
Ability to work independently to collect information.
Ability to communicate results of work to classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Using power point presentation and behavioural illustration.
Laboratory training
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of group projects.
Assessment of projects conducted individually.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific task.
Ability to solve problems.
Ability to computers and internet to search and restore information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit activities, homework and writing reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the laboratory written reports
Evaluating activities and assignments
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
270
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills: Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills: Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( Activities and Quizzes) 3-6-8 10%
2
Monthly Exam. 9 10%
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 6 hr/ week
E. Learning Resources
15. Required Text(s)
Review of Medical Physiology, William F Ganong
Text book of Medical Physiology, Arthur C Guyton
The human central nervous system 4th Ed. R.Nieuwehuys, J. Voogd and V.
Huijzen
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
The rat nervous system 2nd Ed , Paxinos Ed
271
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
http://faculty.ksu.edu.sa/alhazza/default.aspx
http://www.neurophys.com/contents.shtml
http://www.scribd.com/doc/7313965/NeuroPhysiology-Exam-MCQs
http://www.bramjnet.com/vb3/showthread.php?t=540883
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Modern lecture rooms.
Equipped laboratories.
16. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes – Hormones analysis Kits- incubators – autoclaves – titration
equipment –water baths – digital lab. - Safety facilities
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questioners for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental studying plan
3. Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Installation of modern microscopes, digital labs and maintenance.
272
Implementation of suggestions administration
Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course
273
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 436: Reproductive Physiology
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
274
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
C. Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Reproductive Physiology (Zoo 436)
2. Credit hours 2 (1+1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Saleh A. Kandeal
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Sixth level ( optional )
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
General Physiology ( Zoo 332 )
13. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
275
B. Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
To let students get acquainted with the following :
Studying major basics of Reproductive Physiology.
Studying Reproductive functions and stages of reproductive activity.
Interpretation of reproductive phenomena.
Acquainting with recent technologies in reproduction.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental course planning committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments,
slides and new preparations.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with equivalent local and international
courses.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contact
hours
- Introduction
- Hormones of reproduction
- Physiology of male reproduction
- Physiology of spermatozoa inside the female
reproductive tract
- Oogenesis and oocyte maturation
- Ovulation and reproductive cycles
- Modern techniques in reproduction
1
1
4
1
1
3
3
1
1
4
1
1
3
3
276
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 14 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 14
Other:
-
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
15
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
To let students get acquainted with the following :
Identifying structure and function of male and female reproductive
systems.
Interpretation of normal and erratic reproductive phenomena .
Describing histological structure of reproductive systems and relationship
between structure and function.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using power point presentation and reproductive
illustration)
Laboratory practice and microscope examination. (Conducting
experiments and writing reports).
Activities and assignments.
277
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports
Evaluation of activities and results.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Examination of morphology and anatomy of reproductive organs.
Microscopic examination of histological sections.
Interpreting reproductive phenomena.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of physiological illustrations
Laboratory training.
Activities and homework.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports concerning practical activities.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific task.
Ability to work independently to dissect and characterize reproductive
system.
Using power point presentation and illustration.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Close monitoring during practical sessions
Using power point presentation and behavioural illustration.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of student contribution in lab sessions.
Evaluation of the obtained lab results.
278
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to collect and analyse results of lab work..
Ability to computers and internet to search and restore information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit activities, assignments and written reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the laboratory written reports and contribution in general
discussion
Evaluating internet activities and assignments
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Monthly Exam 1 7 10%
2
Monthly Exam 2 10 10%
3 Lab. Homework 12 5%
279
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
17. Required Text(s)
-
- Austin C.R. and Short R.V. (1987).
Reproduction in Mammals, Cambridge Univ.
Press , Cambridge , London ( Series 1-5 )
- Hafez , E.S.E ( 2202 ) >
Reproduction in Farm Animals , Lea and Febiger
2. Essential References
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Not applicable
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
280
Modern lecture rooms.
Equipped laboratories.
18. Computing resources
Not applicable
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes – electron microscope – slides – dissecting sets …… etc
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questioners for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental course committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental specialised
committee.
3. Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Installation of modern microscopes and digital labs
Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
281
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 441: Histochemistry
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
282
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Histochemistry (Zoo 441)
2. Credit hours 2.0
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. NOORY TAHER TAIB
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Eighth level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
General Zoology (Zoo 101)and Microtecnique ( Zoo 261).
14. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
283
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
To acquire students with basic knowledge of various histochemical techniques
used to detect chemical components existed in animal and human tissues.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental course planning committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments, and
new techniques concerning Histochemistry.
Updating course resources using internet materials and different methods.
Comparison of course topics with those equivalent courses given in local
and international institutions.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
Introduction and properties applied of histochemistry 1 2
Fixation of the tissues with different histochemical
fixatives
3 6
Histochemical battery for detection carbohydrates
(glycogen) and differentiation of mucosubestances.
2 4
Methods for detection of proteins and amino acids 3 6
Methods for detection of different types of simple and
conjegated lipids.
2 4
Enzymes histochemistry to detected and isolated
various enzymes by different methods.
3 6
284
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture:28 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 28
Other:
-
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
45
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Identifying properties and different methods of histochemical techniques.
Determining various methods for detecting and staining lipids,
carbohydrates and proteins.
Determining proteins and various amino acids.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using Power Point presentation and illustrations)
Laboratory practice and microscope examination. (Conducting
experiments and writing reports).
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Mid-term and final exams
285
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of activities and assignments.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Examine and describe carbohydrates and mucosubestances.
Prepare slides and samples for proteins and amino acids.
Prepare lab solutions.
Conduct searches and analyse histochemical data.
Use computers and internet to research purposes.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of histochemical illustrations
Laboratory training.
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of activities and assignments.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific task.
Ability to work independently to conduct a specific experiment.
Ability to communicate results of work to classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Work independently.
Work as part of a team.
Communicate results of work to classmates.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of student cooperation in lab sessions.
Assessment of projects conducted individually.
286
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific task.
Ability to solve problems.
Ability to computers and internet to search and restore information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit activities, assignments and written reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the laboratory written reports
Evaluating activities and assignments
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1 Class activates ( activities and homework) 3-6-8 10%
287
2
Monthly Exam. 9 10%
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
1. Required Text(s)
Histochemistry, Theoretical and applied. By A.G.e. Pearse, Fourth edition 1998.
2. Essential References
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
Histochemistry , applied , King Saud University Press,1985.
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Prepared lecture rooms.
Equipped laboratories.
288
2. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes– autoclaves – titration equipment –water baths – digital lab. - Safety
facilities- Required chemicals for histochemical techniques and different
substrates for enzymes.
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questioners for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental course committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental specialised
committee
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Installation of modern microscopes, digital labs and maintenance.
Implementation of suggestions administration
Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by Staff member/Chairman/Special committee
when required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the Departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
289
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 455: Genetic Engineering
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
290
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Genetic Engineering (Zoo 455)
2. Credit hours 2.0
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Abdulaziz Al-Khedhairy
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Elective
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Zoo 342 and Zoo 352
15. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
291
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
An introduction to genetic engineering.
Highlight of Human Genome Project.
Gene therapy and Biotechnology.
Basics of genetically-engineered agriculture and genetically-modified animals
and food.
Basic overview of some aspects of the genetic engineering debate and
legislation.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental studying plan committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments,
slides and new preparations.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with those equivalent courses given in local
and international institutions.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
An introduction to genetic engineering 2 4
Knowledge of Human Genome Project 2 4
Knowledge of gene therapy 2 4
Knowledge of Biotechnology 2 4
Basics of genetically-engineered agriculture and
genetically-modified animals and food
3 6
Basic overview of some aspects of the genetic
engineering debate and legislation.
2 4
292
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 28 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 28
Other:
-
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
45
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
An introduction to genetic engineering.
Human Genome Project.
Principle of gene therapy and Biotechnology.
Basics of genetically-engineered agriculture and genetically-modified
animals and food.
Basic overview of some aspects of the genetic engineering debate and
legislation.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using PowerPoint presentation and illustrations)
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
293
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Ability to prepare slides and samples.
Ability to prepare lab solutions.
Ability to conduct searches and analyse genetic data.
Capability to use computers and internet.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of genetic illustrations
Laboratory training.
Activities and homework.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to perform specific task.
Ability to work independently to collect specific information.
Ability to communicate results of work to classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Using power point presentation and illustration.
Training on different laboratory techniques.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of group experimental work.
Assessment of experimental conducted individually.
294
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to play a specific role.
Ability to solve problems.
Ability to computers and internet to search and restore the information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit activities, assignments and written reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the laboratory results and written reports
Evaluating activities and assignments
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( activities and homework) 3-6-8 10%
2
Monthly Exam. 9 10%
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
295
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
3. Required Text(s)
Eelective
2. Essential References
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
Elective
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Lecture rooms equipped with audio – visual aids
Equipped laboratories.
4. Computing resources
296
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes – autoclaves – titration equipment – measuring equipments –water
baths – digital lab. - safety facilities
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental course committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the department.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Installation of modern microscopes and digital labs
Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
297
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 456: Bioinformatics
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
298
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Bioinformatics (Zoo 456)
2. Credit hours 2 ( 1 + 1 )
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Molecular biology ( Zoo 242 )
16. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
299
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
- Overview of molecular biology
- Introduction to computational biology and bioinformatics
- DNA Sequencing
- Sequence databases, sequence formats, BLAST online tools
- Pairwise sequence alignment
- Multiple sequence alignments
- Database searching
- Construction of phylogenetic trees
- Predicting protein structure
- Microarray technology and image analysis
- Web-based tools and softwares for bioinformatics
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Updating the course with the latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating of the practical sessions.
Updating the course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with those equivalent courses given in local
and international institutions.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
Topics :
- Overview of molecular biology 1 1
- Introduction to computational biology and
bioinformatics
1 1
- DNA Sequencing 1 1
- Sequence databases, sequence formats, BLAST
online tools
1 1
- Pairwise sequence alignment 1 1
- Multiple sequence alignments 1 1
- Database searching 1 1
300
- Construction of phylogenetic trees 1 1
- Predicting protein structure 1 1
- Microarray technology and image analysis 2 2
- Data Management and Mining 1 1
Web-based tools and softwares for bioinformatics 1 1
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 13 Tutorial: 5-7 Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 13
Other:
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week) 26
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
- Overview of molecular biology
- Introduction to computational biology and bioinformatics
- DNA Sequencing and sequence analysis
- Sequence databases, sequence formats, BLAST online tools
- Pair wise sequence alignment
- Multiple sequence alignments
- Database searching
- Construction of phylogenetic trees
- Predicting protein structure
- Microarray technology and image analysis
- Web-based tools and softwares for bioinformatics
301
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using PowerPoint presentation and illustrations)
Laboratory practice and exercises (Conducting data analysis and writing
reports).
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Mid-term and final exams.
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Perform data analysis.
Search the databases for matching sequences.
Construct a phylogenetic tree and interpret it.
Analyze microarray images.
Predict protein structure.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of illustrative examples
Laboratory training
Activities and assignments
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and assignments
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific project.
Ability to work independently to analyse data collected.
Ability to communicate results of work to classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
302
Close monitoring while performing practical work
Using power point presentation and illustration.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of group experiment and data analysis tests
Assessment of projects conducted individually.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific task
Ability to solve problems.
Ability to computers and internet to search and restore the information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit activities, assignments and written reports.
6 Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the written reports
Evaluating activities and assignments
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
303
Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activities ( Homework, activities, discussion)
3, 5, 8, 12 10%
2
Monthly Exams. 7, 12 20%
3
Lab. Exam. 13 30%
4
Final Exam. 15 40%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab Sessions.
Office hours 6 hr/ Week.
E Learning Resources
5. Required Text(s)
Lesk, A. M. (2008). Introduction to Bioinformatics. 3rd ed., Oxford University
Press.
2. Essential References
Krawetz, S. A. and Womble, D. D. (2003). Introduction to Bioinformatics: A
Theoretical and Practical Approach. Humana Press Inc.
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (attach List)
Ramsden, J. (2009). Bioinformatics: An Introduction (Computational Biology).
Springer; 2nd ed.
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package and other related software
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
304
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Modern lecture rooms.
6. Computing resources
7. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental studying plan
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Implementation of administration suggestions
Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
305
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 457: Cytogenetics and Cell Culture
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
306
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Cytogenetics and Cell Culture (Zoo 457)
2. Credit hours (2 + 1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Abdulaziz Al-Saleh
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Elective course
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Zoo 342 and 352
17. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
307
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
To acquire students with basic knowledge about the following :-
Sterilization and aseptic techniques
Media types and media preparation.
Cell separation and culturing.
Chromosome structure and terminology
Chromosome variations and aberrations.
Karyotyping and staining technologies
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental course planning committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with those equivalent courses given in local
and international institutions.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
Sterilization and aseptic technique 2 4
Media types and media preparation 3 6
Cell separation and culturing 2 4
Chromosome structure and terminology. 2 4
Chromosome variations and aberrations 2 4
Karyotyping and staining technologies 3 6
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture:
14
Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork/Internship:
28
Other: -
308
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
30
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
The student would be able to gain knowledge concerning:
Sterilization and aseptic techniques
Media types and media preparation.
Cell separation and culturing.
Chromosome structure and terminology
Chromosome variations and aberrations.
Karyotyping and staining technologies
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using PowerPoint presentation and illustrations)
Laboratory practice and experimentation
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Monthly and final exams
Evaluation of lab activities and results.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
309
Sterilization and aseptic techniques
Media types and how to prepare media.
Cell separation and culturing methodologies.
Chromosome structure
Chromosome variations and aberrations due to mutation.
Karyotyping and staining techniques
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Laboratory training and experimental implementation.
Using power point presentation
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Monthly and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific duty.
Ability to work independently to dell with cell culture equipment.
Ability to discuss results of work to classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Using power point presentation
Close monitoring while dealing with tissue culture techniques
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of student contribution in lab session.
Wvaluation of the obtained results of the lab work.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work indepently in a proper manner with cell culture tools
Ability to computers and internet to search and restore the information.
310
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the laboratory effort and contribution in discussion
Evaluating internet activities
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
First exam 6 10%
2
Second exam. 10 10%
3
First lab exam 7 15%
4
Second lab exam 13 15%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
311
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Office hours 8 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
8. Required Text(s)
- Cell and tissue culture by John paul
2. Essential References
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
-
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Modern lecture rooms with data show.
Equipped laboratories with recent facilities.
9. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes – inverted microscope – ovens – incubators – autoclaves – titration
equipment – measuring equipments –water baths – digital lab. - safety facilities
312
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Students- faculty meetings.
Course evaluation by student questionaries
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the department.
3 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Installation of digital labs and maintenance.
Implementation of suggestions administration
Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
313
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 458: Human Genetics
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
314
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Human Genetics (Zoo 458)
2. Credit hours 2.0 (1+1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Abdulaziz Al-Khedhairy
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Eighth level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Genetics (Zoo 342 and Zoo 352)
18. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
315
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
To acquire students with basic knowledge of
Properties and structure of human chromosomes and preparation of
karyotypes.
Construct chromosomal maps and perform genetic calculations.
Determine chromosomal aberrations and syndromes.
Understand patterns of genetic inheritance and sex-linked genetics
Mutations, mutants and blood genetic diseases.
Latest developments in human genetics and their applications.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental course planning committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments,
slides and new preparations.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with those equivalent courses given in local
and international institutions.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
Introduction and properties of human chromosomes 1 2
Linkage, crossing over and chromosomal mapping 2 4
Sex determination systems and sex-linked inheritance 1 2
Pedigree analysis, patterns of inheritance and
calculations
2 4
Chromosomal aberrations, syndromes and
abnormalities
3 6
Mutations, mutants and blood genetic diseases. 2 4
IQ tests, intermarriage and genetic consulting 2 4
Avoidance of genetic disease, latest developments and
future
1 2
316
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 14 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 28
Other:
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
30
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Recognizing properties and structure of human chromosomes and
preparation of karyotypes.
Defining construct chromosomal maps and perform genetic calculations.
Determine chromosomal aberrations and syndromes.
Understand patterns of genetic inheritance and sex-linked genetics
Describing mutations, mutants and blood genetic diseases.
Outlying latest developments in human genetics and their applications.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using Power Point presentation and illustrations)
Laboratory practice on different human genetics techniques
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
317
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports
Evaluation of student activities and assignments.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Examine and describe karyotypes.
Prepare slides and samples.
Prepare lab solutions.
Conduct searches and analyse genetic data.
Use computers and internet to search for recent human genetics
information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of genetic illustrations
Laboratory training.
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of activities and assignments.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific experiment.
Ability to work independently to deal with human genetics facilities.
Ability to present results of work to classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Close monitoring while performing practical work
Using power point presentation and illustration.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of student cooperation in laboratory.
Evaluation of the obtained lab results.
318
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to obtain lab results.
Ability to be involved in group discussion.
Ability to computers and internet to search and restore the information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit activities, aggignments and written reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the laboratory written reports
Evaluating activities and assignments
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( activities and homework) 3-6-8 10%
2
Monthly Exam. 9 10%
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
319
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
10. Required Text(s)
- Robert L. Nussbaum, Roderick R. McInnes, and Huntington F. Willard. (2007)
Thompson & Thompson Genetics in Medicine. Saunders company and Harcourt
Brace Jovanovich, Inc., Philadelphia, USA
- Levitan, G. ( 1988 ). Textbook of Human Genetics. Oxiford University Press, New
York, Oxford.
2. Essential References
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
- Lewis Ricki (2005) Human Genetics. McGraw-Hill Science Engineering, USA.
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
prepared lecture rooms.
Equipped laboratories.
320
11. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes –– incubators – autoclaves – titration equipment –water baths –
digital lab. - safety facilities
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questioners for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental studying plan
3. Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Installation of modern microscopes and digital labs
Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
321
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 461: Laboratory technology
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
322
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Laboratory technology (Zoo 461)
2. Credit hours 3.0
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Alhimaidi Ahmed R.
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Level seven
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any) (Zoo 261)
Microscopy technique
19. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
323
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
Safety guidelines in laboratories
Handling experimental animals
Preparation of laboratories solutions and reagents
Using calorimetric methods for detection of serum analysis
Blood, urine and faecal analysis
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (Eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Updating the student with new methodology for analyses
Annual review of course by departmental studying plan committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments,
slides and new preparations.
Updating course resources using new instruments
Comparison of course topics with those equivalent courses given in local
and international institutions.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
Introduction and handling of experimental animals 1 2
Preparation of physiological fluids 2 4
Collecting blood samples from experimental animals 1 2
Glucose , Protein, ALP, AST,ALT and Albumen
analyses
2 4
Urea ,Uric acid and Creatinine content 1 2
Urine chemical analyses
Gross and microscopic Fesses analyses
1
2
2
2
Semen collecting and Analyses
2 2
324
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork/Int
ernship: 40
Other:Lab
reports 12
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
40
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Student would be acquired with:
Laboratory animal handling
Determine preparation of laboratory solutions
Collecting the samples from experimental animals and examine such
samples using various laboratory techniques
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using PowerPoint presentation and illustrations)
Laboratory practice and microscopic examination. (Conducting
experiments and writing reports).
Visiting some Labs. Unit at the hospital.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Mid-term and final exams
325
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and Reports
Term paper or small research
b. Cognitive Skills
(I) Cognitive skills to be developed
Ability to examine and describe methodology of experiment.
Prepare fluid and collecting sample from animals
Conducting hormone analyses.
Use instrument for different urine analyses
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of experimental animal models
Laboratory training on different methods.
Searching activities
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and results
Evaluation of activities
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(I) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to perform a specific task.
Ability to work independently to handle experimental animals and collect
samples for laboratory illustrations.
Ability to communicate results of work to classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Work independently.
Work as part of a team.
Use of power point presentation and illustrations
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of student laboratory work.
Assessment of student ability to handle laboratory animals and collecting
samples for lab analysis.
326
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(I) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to perform a specific task.
Ability to solve problems.
Ability to computers and internet to search and restore the embryonic
information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit activities, homework and writing reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the laboratory written reports and contribution in general
discussion
Evaluating internet activities and assignments
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates (term paper preparation ) 3-6-8 15%
3
Lab. Reports Every wk 15%
327
4
Lab. Exam. 14 30%
5
Final Exam. 15 40%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 5 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
12. Required Text(s)
Laboratory technique Analyses by .Noory Altaib and Basher Jaraar.King Saud
University press.2000.
2. Essential References
Semen Analyses its applications and uses: By Dr. Noory Altaib and Basher
Jaraar.King Saud University press.1998.
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journal, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e.
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Advanced lecture rooms.
Equipped laboratories equipped with necessary lab instrumentation.
328
13. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes– incubators – autoclaves – titration equipment – measuring
equipments –water baths – digital lab. - safety facilities
G. Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental studying plan
committee.
15 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
a. Installation of modern microscopes and digital labs
b. Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
329
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 462: Experimental Parasitology
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
330
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Experimental Parasitology, Zoo 462
2. Credit hours 2.0 ( 1+1 )
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Saleh A. Al Quraishy
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Zoo 103 , Zoo 212
20. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
8. Location if not on main campus
331
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
Describe in details the life cycle of medically important parasites.
Define the organs commonly involved in the infection.
Recall the relationship of this infection to symptoms, relapse and the
accompanying pathology.
State the distribution and epidemiology of the parasites
Explain the methods of parasite control, e.g. chemotherapy, molluscicides,
general sanitation plus describing the advantages and disadvantages of
each method.
Demonstrate a broad understanding of the central facts and the
experimental basis of modern Parasitology.
Demonstrate practical skills in fundamental parasitological techniques.
Present and interpret results obtained from using these techniques.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
The block course begins by description of the subject bases by the lecturer,
then the practical in which each student will prepare his own specimen from
the materials offered for each parasite studied. Moreover, a scientific film will
be shown.
On the other hand, an electronic preparation of all items related to the course
from websites.
Annual updating of the course contents with new information using internet
materials.
332
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
1: introduction to the experimental Parasitology:-
4 8
2- Modes of transmission; Whatever oral ingestion,
inhalation, blood transfusion, skin penetrating or inoculation
by a vector.
4 8
3- Management (Clinical, laboratory diagnosis and
treatment)
_ Symptoms and signs of parasitic infections (clinical
manifestations).
_ The proper diagnostic techniques to confirm diagnosis of
parasitic infections.
_ Drugs of choice in treatment of parasitic infections.
4 8
4- Prevention and Control:-
2 4
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 14 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 14
Other:
-
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
45
333
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Students will be able to define the Helminthology – ProtoZoology and
Entomology
Students will be able to recognize the exact definitive and intermediate hosts
for parasitic diseases.
Students will be able to identify the final habitat of each parasite and relate it
to the symptoms and signs of disease.
Students will be able to describe the specific characters of each parasitic class
and its morphological features.
Students should be able to identify different modes of transmission of different
parasite diseases. Whatever oral ingestion, inhalation, blood transfusion, skin
penetrating or inoculation by a vector.
Students will acquire the skills regarding preventive measures in parasitic
infections.
Students will identify different diseases having reservoir hosts and locating
them.
Students will identify different chemotherapeutic agents against parasites.
Students will acquire the skills in selecting best point of interference to cut the
cycle of infection.
Students will be able to describe the best method of health education
concerning with personal and public protection.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using Power Point presentation and illustrations)
Laboratory practice and microscopical examination.
Conducting experiments and writing reports.
Activities and assignments.
Field visits of hospitals and diagnostic laboratories.
334
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Written exams (Mid-term and final exams)
Evaluation of lab reports
Evaluation of Activities and homework.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Use of microscopes.
Identification and description of parasites.
Preparation and examination of fresh materials.
Preparation of permanent slides, chemicals and solutions to diagnose
parasites.
Using computers and internet for research purposes.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of labelled drawings and illustrations.
Practical training.
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Major and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and homework.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to perform specific task.
Ability to work independently to produce results.
Ability to communicate results of work to classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Close monitoring while performing practical work
Using power point presentation and illustration.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of group projects.
Assessment of projects conducted individually.
335
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific task.
Ability to solve problems.
Ability to computers and internet to search and restore the information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit activities, assignments and written reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the laboratory written reports
Evaluating activities and assignments
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( activities and homework) 3-6-8 10%
2
Monthly Exam. 9 10%
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5 Final Exam. 15 50%
336
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 5 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
14. Required Text(s)
Mehlhorn H. (2008). Encyclopaedia of Parasitology
Chiodini et al. (2001). Atlas of medical helminthology and protoZoology
Roberts et al. (2004). Foundation of parasitology
2. Essential References
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journal, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (i.e.
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Advanced lecture rooms.
Equipped laboratories equipped with necessary lab instrumentation.
15. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
337
Microscopes– incubators – autoclaves – titration equipment – measuring
equipments –water baths – digital lab. - safety facilities
G. Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental studying plan
committee.
16 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
a. Installation of modern microscopes and digital labs
b. Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5 Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
338
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 464: Biotechnology
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
339
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Biotechnology (Zoo 464)
2. Credit hours 2.0 (1+1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Abdulaziz Al-Khedhairy
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Eighth level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Genetics (Zoo 424)
21. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
340
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
To acquire students with basic knowledge and definitions of biotechnology.
To acquire students knowledge of different biotechnology fields and its
approaches.
To enable students to acquire knowledge of diverse genetic engineering
concepts and its tools.
To enable students to understand and acquire knowledge of diverse
biotechnological applications in agriculture, medicine and industry
To acquire students with knowledge regarding future applications and
potentially risky outcomes of biotechnology applications in various disciplines.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental course planning committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments,
slides and new preparations.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with those equivalent courses given in local
and international institutions.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
Introduction and definition of biotechnology and its
diverse concepts
1 2
Fields and tools of biotechnology 2 4
Concepts of genetic engineering and its strategies 2 4
Different applications of biotechnology in agriculture 2 4
Different applications of biotechnology in medicine 3 6
future applications and potentially risky outcomes of
biotechnology applications in various disciplines
2 4
341
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 14 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 28
Other:
-
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
30
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Identifying basic definitions of biotechnology.
Describing different biotechnology fields and its approaches.
Outlying diverse genetic engineering concepts and its tools.
Recognizing diverse biotechnological applications in agriculture, medicine and
industry.
Defining future applications and potentially risky outcomes of biotechnology
applications in various disciplines.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using PowerPoint presentation and illustrations)
Laboratory practice and microscope examination. (Conducting
experiments and writing reports).
Activities and assignments.
342
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and results.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Examine purify and quantify nucleic acids (DNA and RNA).
Prepare biological samples from different sources (Blood, bacteria, liver,
kidney, etc...).
Prepare lab solutions (e.g. electrophoresis buffers and reagent).
Using computers and internet to search for recent information in
Biotechnology.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of schematic representations, illustrations and posters
Laboratory training on operating equipment in Biotechnology.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports
Evaluation of Activities and assignments
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific task.
Ability to work independently to deal with nucleic aids facilities.
Ability to present results of work to classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Close monitoring while performing behavioural examination and
experimentation
Using power point presentation and illustration.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
343
Assessment of student cooperation in lab sessions.
Evaluation of obtained results
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to obtain results of practical work.
Ability to solve problems.
Ability to computers and internet to search and restore the information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit activities, homework and writing reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating written reports and contribution in general discussion
Evaluating lab activities and internet.
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( activities and homework) 3-6-8 10%
344
2
Monthly Exam. 9 10%
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
16. Required Text(s)
-
2. Essential References
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
- Coli Ratledge and Bjorn Kristiansen (2006). Basic Biotechnology. - William J. Thoman and Michael A. Palladino (2008). ). Introduction to
Biotechnology, (2nd Ed.).
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
345
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Prepared lecture rooms.
Equipped laboratories.
17. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Incubators – autoclaves – titration equipment – measuring equipments –water
baths – pH meters – electrophoresis units for nucleic acid separation – digital lab.
- safety facilities
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the department.
4 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Installation of modern microscopes and digital labs
Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
346
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 465: Field Studies
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
347
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Field Studies Zoo 465
2. Credit hours 5 (0 + 5)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Dr. Mohammed S. Al-Khalifa
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Last Summer Semester before the Completion of the degree (Completing 34
specialised credit hours)
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Zoo 103
22. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
Selected Regions of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
348
B Objectives
Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
Student should have a clear concept of the following :
Knowledge of animal habitats and ecological factors affecting animal
distribution
Knowledge of pattern of study in the field and report writing
Visits of different Governmental agencies related to field studies of
animals
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Course planning committee review the contents of the course annually.
Updating the course with latest results and recommendation of researches
in the field.
Use of Internet Search on the subject.
Comparison of course topics with equivalent ones in local and
international courses in various institutions.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
Field Study on Ecology and Pollution 2 70
Field Study on Invertebrates 2 70
Field Study on Aves and Mammals 2 70
Field Study on Amphibians and Reptiles 2 70
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 05 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 25
Other:
-
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week) 60
349
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned. – 2 Exams 2nd
and
4th
Week
-2 Written Papers about the Various Aspects of the Course
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Acquire practical Patterns of field study
Determine observation of different ecological habitat
Label collection of specimens and their classification and preservation
Implement visits of related industries and companies and writing the
report
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
Preparing worksheets with drawing
Field Training, performing field experiments and sample examination
Use of Power Point for presentation in the Lecture.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Two seasonal assessments
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of activities and assignments.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Ability to identify and classify the Common Invertebrates and Vertebrates
Ability to describe an Invertebrates and Vertebrates taxonomically.
Ability to describe the modifications of different body parts of
Invertebrates and Vertebrates to adapt with the environment.
350
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of whole insect specimens
Practical observations on the insects and invertebrate organisms.
Activities and homework implemented in the field.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Evaluation of field reports submitted by the end of the course
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to collect, dissect and examine animal samples.
Ability to work independently to conduct certain field study.
Ability to discuss results of work to classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Work independently.
Work as part of a team.
Communicate results of work to others.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of group projects on the field.
Assessment of projects conducted individually in the field.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Skill to work in a team to conduct a specific project.
Skill to Identify and classify the specimens.
Skill to describe animal specimen.
Skill to conduct searches and restore information using the internet.
Skill to learn about Pollution and its Measurements.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit activities, homework and written reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
351
Evaluating the laboratory written reports
Evaluating activities and homework
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not Applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not Applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not Applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Field activates 50%
2
Final report 50%
3
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff members over Field Sessions.
E Learning Resources
18. Required Text(s)
-
2. Essential References
352
Roger G. B. and H. E. Jaques (1983) " How to Know the Insects" Wm. C.
Brown Company Dubuque, Iowa. Pp-409
Al-Balwi, F. H. (2005) " Ichthyology" Scietific Publications, King Saud
University pp:445
Mohamed K. Al-Sadoon (1998). "Venomous Snakes of Saudi Arabia" :
Scientific Publications King Saud University pp:120
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Different equipment and facilities required to achieve field work
(Collection, dissection, examination)
19. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes –Insect Nets, Killing Jars, Aspirators, Spreading Board, Insect Box,
safety Facilities, Animal Collection Tools and Pollution Measuring Machines
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
353
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental studying plan
committee.
17 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
a. Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course
354
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 466: Industrial Environmental pollution
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
355
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Industrial Environmental Pollution (Zoo 466)
2. Credit hours 2
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Ibrahim N. AL-Suwaiti.
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Elective course.
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Ecological pollution (Zoo 375 )
23. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
356
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
Introduction to Industrial Environmental Pollution.
Chemical industry and Heavy metals.
Sewage and radioactive waste, Pesticides and fertilizers.
Adverse impacts of industrial pollution.
Standards and legislations.
Monitoring industrial pollution.
Petrochemical, fertilizer and petroleum as industrial study cases.
Ways of removal of industrial pollution.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental studying plan committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with those equivalent courses given in local
and international institutions.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of Weeks Contact hours
General Introduction (Ecological pollution) 1 1
Industrial pollution. 2 2
Heavy metals. 1 1
Sewage treatment. 1 1
Radioactive waste. 1 1
Pesticides. 1 1
Petrochemicals. 2 2
Fertilizers. 2 2 Petroleum. 2 2
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 13 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 13
Other:
-
357
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
26
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
The student would acquire information on:
Methods of studying problems of environment.
The effects of different types of pollutants.
Advances ecological pollution.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using PowerPoint presentation and illustrations)
Laboratory practice and microscope examination. (Conducting
experiments and writing reports).
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Skills to record and describe types of ecological pollution.
Skills to search and analyse different types of pollution parameters.
Skills to use computers and internet on analyses of data .
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
358
Laboratory training.
Activities and field trip
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific task.
Ability to work independently to collect and analyse pollutants.
Ability to communicate results of work to calssmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Work independently.
Work as part of a team.
Use power point presentation and illustration
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Evaluation of group projects.
Assessment of projects conducted individually.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to record his observations and finding.
Ability to be involved in discussions
Ability to computers and internet to search and restore the information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit activities, assignments and written reports.
(vi) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the field trips written reports
Evaluating the laboratory written reports
Evaluating activities and assignments
359
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( activities and homework) 3-6-8 10%
2
Monthly Exam. 9 10%
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ Week.
E Learning Resources
20. Required Text(s)
Morgan, M. D., J. M. Moran and J. H. Wiersma 1993 : Environmental Science ,
Managing Physical Resources. Volume III. Wm. C. Brown publishers. Oxford.
2. Essential References
Tessier, A. and R. Turner (1995). Metal speciation and Bioavailabity in
Aquatic system. John Wiley & Sobs, New York.
360
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
Katyal, T. and M. Satake. 1993. Environmental pollution. Anmol. Publ. NewDelhi.
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Modern lecture rooms.
Equipped laboratories.
21. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the department.
5 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
361
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental course committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics of course evaluation by students to improve the course.
362
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 471: Animal Behaviour
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
363
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Animal Behaviour (Zoo 471)
2. Credit hours 2 (1 + 1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Dr. Jamaan said Ajarem
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Eighth level
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
General Zoology (Zoo 103 )
24. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
364
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
To acquire students with an importance of the animal behavioural study.
To acquire student with kinds of animal behaviour.
To acquire students with methods al studying behaviour on the fields or
labs.
Hormones and behaviour
Genetics and behaviour
Natural selection and behaviour
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental studying plan committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments,
slides and new preparations.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with those equivalent courses given in local
and international institutions.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
General Introduction 1 1
Meaning of behaviour kids behaviour and behaviours’
Automotives
1 1
Natural selection and behaviour 1 1
Ecology and Adeptness of behaviour 1 1
Finding food 1 1
Living in groups 1 1
Altruism a distinct 1 1
Sexeal Behavior 1 1 Social behaviour 1 1
The role of Hormones an behaviour 1 1
365
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 14 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 28
Other:
-
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
30
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Methods of studying animal behaviour.
Effect of hormones on the behaviour
Latest developments in the field of animal behaviour and it's applications.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using PowerPoint presentation and illustrations)
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of activities and assignments.
366
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Record and describe animal behaviour.
Search and analyse of behavioural date
Use computers and internet to analyses behavioural date .
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of behavioural illustrations
Field training.
Activities and assignments
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of field reports and observation
Evaluation of Activities and assignments
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific task.
Ability to work independently to make field observation.
Ability to present results of work to classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Close monitoring while performing behavioural examination and
experimentation
Using power point presentation and behavioural illustration.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of field reports.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific project.
367
Ability to solve problems.
Ability to computers and internet to search and restore the embryonic
information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit activities, assignments and writing reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the field written reports
Evaluating activities and assignments
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( activities and homework) 3-6-8 10%
2
Monthly Exam. 9 10%
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 25%
5
Final Exam. 15 50%
368
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
22. Required Text(s)
- Mc Farland , D. (1985). Animal Behavior . oxford , U.K.
2. Essential References
Sohn alcok (1999) Animal behaviour , an evolutionary Approch, U.S.A.
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
- Barnard, C.J. (1983) . Animal behaviour , ecology and evolution . U.K.
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Modern lecture rooms.
23. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Rodent cages , wooding box, chemicals, shuttle box , electronic timer
369
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental studying plan
committee.
18 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
a. Installation of modern microscopes and digital labs
b. Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
370
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 480: Wildlife Protection
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
371
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Wildlife Protection (Zoo 480)
2. Credit hours 2.0 (2 + 0)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
10- Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. Dr. Ali S. Al-Akel
11- Level/year at which this course is offered
Elective course
12- Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Zoo 373
25. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
372
B. Objectives:
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
Wildlife in the Arab Peninsula and geographic distribution
Role of Wildlife in ecological balance
Reasons of organism’s extinction & Role of local and international
organization in animal conservation.
Legislations and systems for wildlife protection.
Wildlife management.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental studying plan committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments,
slides and new preparations.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with those equivalent courses given in local
and international institutions.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Week
s
Contac
t hours
Wildlife & animal geographical distribution 1 2
Ecological balance& importance of wildlife conservation 2 4
Importance of wildlife conservation & reasons of organisms
extinction.
2 4
Role of local and international organization in animal
conservation
1 2
Wildlife animals in Arab Peninsula (Vertebrates &
Invertebrates )
2 4
Reared and endangered species 2 4
373
Wildlife management 2 4
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 24 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 16
Other:
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill.
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Understand Wildlife in Arabian Peninsula.
Find the Reasons of extinction of species
Know the Legislation and system for wildlife protection.
Methods employed in Wildlife management.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In class lecturing (using PowerPoint and illustrations)
Laboratory practice and microscope examination. (Conducting
experiments and writing reports).
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of reports and examinations
374
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Ability to recognize wildlife in Saudi Arabia
Understand ecological balance and the role of Wildlife in this balance.
International organization in animal conservation
Distinguish between reared and endangered species & wildlife
management.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Field training.
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to collect information on wildlife in Saudi
Arabia.
Ability to work independently to write field trips report.
Ability to communicate results of work to classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Using power point presentation and illustration
Observation of student performance while conducting field work.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of group performance in field trips.
Assessment of activities and assignments.
375
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific task.
Ability to be involved in group discussion
Ability to computers and internet to search and restore the information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit activities, homework and written reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the field written reports
Evaluating activities and assignments
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assess-ment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
First theoretical exam 6 15%
2
Second theoretical exam 12 15%
3
First report 6 15%
4
Second report 12 15%
376
5
Final Exam 15 40%
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 6 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
1. Required Text(s)
Primak, R. and Demerdash, M. (2003). The basics of conservation is vital, Dar -
AlMarikh Publishing House, Riyadh, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
2. Essential References
Pettigrew, W. (1982). Conservation. Thechaucer Press. Great Britain.
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
Caughley, G. and Sinclair, A. R. E. (1994). Wildlife ecology and Management.
Blackwell Scintific Publication, USA.
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Optically and electronically facilitated lecture rooms.
24. Computing resources
377
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental studying plan
6 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Implementation of suggestions administration
Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
378
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 481: Venomous Animals
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
379
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Venomous Animals (Zoo 481)
2. Credit hours 2 (1+1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Dr. Mohammed Khalid Al-Sadoon
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Elective course
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Zoo 327 (Herpetology)
26. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
Non
8. Location if not on main campus
380
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
To acquire students with the describing general Knowledge of Biology of
Venomous animals and venomous apparatus structure.
To enable students to understand the chemistry and toxicity of venomous
animals.
Outlying the protection and treatment of venomous.
Defining the various types of venomous animals and effects of venomous
animals of Saudi Arabia.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental studying plan committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with those equivalent courses given in local
and international institutions.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
Introduction 1 1
Biology of venomous animals 2 2
Venom apparatus structure 2 2
The chemistry and toxicity of venomous animals 2 2
Venomous Effects 2 2
Protection from venomous animals 1 1
Treatment of venom 1 1
Venomous animals of Saudi Arabia 3 3
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
381
Lecture: 14 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 14
Other:
-
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
15
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Identifying Biological characters of venomous animals .
Recognizing the chemistry and toxicity of venomous animals.
Outlying the various species of Venomous animals .
Identifying the Protection from venomous animals and treatment of
venoms.
Defining various types of venomous animals of their effects in Saudi
Arabia.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (Using power point presentation and illustration)
Laboratory practice and microscope examination. (Conducting
experiments and writing reports).
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
382
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Examine and dissect animals.
Use computers and internet to search for recent treatrment and protection
information about venomous animals.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Use of illustrations of power point presentation
Laboratory training for examine and dissect animals.
Activities and assignments.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific experiment.
Ability to work independently to conduct a specific project.
Ability to communicate results of work to classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Close monitoring while practical work
Using power point presentation and illustration.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of student cooperation in lab sessions.
383
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific project.
Ability to solve problems.
Ability to computers and internet to search and restore the information
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit activities, homework and writing reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the laboratory written reports
Evaluating activities and assignments
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activities ( activities, homework and practical exam )
3-6-8 30%
2
Monthly Exam -1-. 9 10%
384
3
Monthly Exam -2- 13 10 %
4
Final Exam. 15 50%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
25. Required Text(s)
- -Bucherl & Buckley. Venomous Animals and Their Venoms. Academic Press
(1971).
2. Essential References
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
385
Prepared lecture rooms.
Equipped laboratories.
26. Computing resources
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questioners for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental studying plan
7 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Installation of modern microscopes and digital labs
Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
386
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 482: Organic Adaptation of Chordates
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
387
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2
Internal Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Organic Adaptation of Chordates (Zoo 482)
2. Credit hours 2 (1+1)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course
Prof. MOHAMED A. AL-DAKHIL
5. Level/year at which this course is offered
Elective course
6. Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
Zoo 103
27. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
388
B Objectives
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
Provide students with basic knowledge of properties and structure of organs of
the chordate body.
To enable students to study the modification & adaptations of the chordate
organs.
To enable students to determine stimuli which affect the chordate organs, and
how organs respond in both aquatic and terrestrial environments.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental studying planning committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments,
slides and new preparations.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with those equivalent courses given in local
and international institutions.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the
Bulletin or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contac
t hours
Some basic organs of Urochordata 1 1
Some basic organs of Cephalochordata 1 1
Some basic organs of Agnatha 1 1
Some basic organs of Chondrichthyes
Some basic organs of Osteichthyes
Some basic organs of Amphibia
Some basic organs of Reptilia
Some basic organs of Aves
Some basic organs of Mammals
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: 13 Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork Other:
389
/Internship: 13
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
26
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill;
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Student would be able to:
Acquire basic knowledge of structure and function of different organ of the
Chordata body.
Recognise modifications of the Chordate organ and its functions.
Define stimuli which affect Chordate organ and the consequence response
of organ to structure.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
In-class lecturing (using Power Point presentation and illustrations).
Laboratory practice and microscope examination. (Conducting
experiments and writing reports).
Activities and homework.
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and assignments
390
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Ability to recognise different anatomical features of chordate organ.
Ability to use different of stimuli to adaptation.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Laboratory training in dissecting chordate
Use of power point presentation and illustration
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Mid-term and final exams
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations
Evaluation of Activities and assignments.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to record observation.
Ability to work independently to collect environmental information.
Ability to communicate results of work to classmates.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Close monitoring while performing practical examination and
experimentation
Using power point presentation and illustration.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of student participation in field trip.
Assessment of projects conducted individually.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to conduct a specific project.
Ability to solve problems.
Ability to computers and internet to search and restore the information.
391
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit activities, assignments and writing reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the laboratory written reports
Evaluating lab activities and assignments
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Class activates ( activities and homework) 3-6-8 5%
2
Weekly Exam. 10 weekly exam
30%
3
Lab. Homework 12 5%
4
Lab. Exam. 13 20%
5
Final Exam. 15 40%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
392
Alexander, R. McN. 1981. The Chordates. 2nd
ed., London:
Cambridge University Press.
Kluge, A.G.,et al.1977. Chordate Structure & Function, 2nd
ed., New York:
Macmillan Publishing Company.
Pough, F.H.,et al. 2005. Vertebrate life, 7th
ed., New Jersey: Pearson
Education Inc.
Weichert, C.K.1970. Anatomy of the Chordates. 4th
ed., McGraw-Hill
Kogakusha,Ltd.
Young, J.Z. 1981. The Life of Vertebrates, 3rd
ed., Oxford: Clarendon
Press.
E Learning Resources
27. Required Text(s)
2. Essential References
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Lecture rooms equipped with audio – visual aids.
Equipped laboratories.
28. Computing resources
393
3. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list
requirements or attach list)
Microscopes – electron microscope – slides – incubators – digital lab. – safety
facilities
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionaries for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the department.
8 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Installation of modern microscopes and digital labs
Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.
394
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
The National Commission for Academic Accreditation & Assessment
COURSE SPECIFICATION
Zoo 498: Graduation Research Project
Zoology Department
College of Science
King Saud University
2009
395
Course Specification
For Guidance on the completion of this template, please refer to of Handbook 2 Internal
Quality Assurance Arrangements
Institution King Saud University
College/Department College of Science / Zoology Department
A Course Identification and General Information
1. Course title and code: Research project (Zoo 498)
2. Credit hours 2.0 (0 + 2)
3. Program(s) in which the course is offered.
(If general elective available in many programs indicate this rather than list programs)
Zoology program
13- Name of faculty member responsible for the course
All staff members in Zoology Dept.
14- Level/year at which this course is offered
Eighth level
15- Pre-requisites for this course (if any)
None
28. Co-requisites for this course (if any)
None
8. Location if not on main campus
396
B- Objectives:
1. Summary of the main learning outcomes for students enrolled in the course.
To let student be able to determine the scientific researches in the
specialized periodicals.
Acquaintance with different methods of information collection from
different sources.
The ability to be familiar with designing and executing experiments.
The ability to collect date
Discussion of the obtained results and reaching to conclusions and
recommendations.
Writing and submitting the final report.
2. Briefly describe any plans for developing and improving the course that are being
implemented. (eg increased use of IT or web based reference material, changes in
content as a result of new research in the field)
Annual review of course by departmental course planning committee.
Updating the course with latest developments in the field.
Annual review and updating practical sessions with new experiments,
slides and new preparations.
Updating course resources using internet materials.
Comparison of course topics with equivalent local and international
courses.
C. Course Description (Note: General description in the form to be used for the Bulletin
or Handbook should be attached)
1 Topics to be Covered
Topic No of
Weeks
Contact
hours
Collection of information and literature 4 8
Design of the experiment 2 4
Executing of the experiment 4 8
Date collection, tabulation and analysis 2 4
Writing and submitting the scientific report 2 4
14 28
397
2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):
Lecture: - Tutorial: Practical/Fieldwork
/Internship: 28
Other:
3. Additional private study/learning hours expected for students per week. (This should
be an average: for the semester not a specific requirement in each week)
28
4. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning
For each of the domains of learning shown below indicate:
A brief summary of the knowledge or skill the course is intended to develop;
A description of the teaching strategies to be used in the course to develop that
knowledge or skill.
The methods of student assessment to be used in the course to evaluate learning
outcomes in the domain concerned.
a. Knowledge
(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired
Determine the scientific researches in the specialized periodicals.
Acquaintance with different methods of information collection from
different sources.
The ability to be familiar with designing and executing experiments.
The ability to collect date
Discuss the obtained results and reaching to conclusions and
recommendations.
Writing and submitting the final report.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge
Laboratory practice and microscope examination. (Conducting experiments and
writing reports).
398
(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired
Evaluation of lab reports, designing and executing experiments
Evaluation of student activities and data collection.
b. Cognitive Skills
(i) Cognitive skills to be developed
Collect blood samples.
Prepare slides and samples.
Prepare chemical solution.
Conduct researches and analyse data.
Use computers and internet.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills
Laboratory training on different designing experiments.
Using illustrations and power point presentation
(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills
Evaluation of lab reports and examinations.
Evaluation of student activities and homework.
Estimation of the final report.
c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility
(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be
developed
Ability to work in a team to conduct deal with specific project.
Ability to work independently to conduct a specific project.
Ability to present results of work to others.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities
Close monitoring while performing practical work and data collection
Using power point presentation and illustration.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry
responsibility
Assessment of student cooperation in lab sessions.
Assessment of the obtained lab results and final reports.
d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills
399
(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.
Ability to work in a team to conduct a practical work.
Ability to solve problems.
Ability to computers and internet to search and restore the information.
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Promoting students to submit activities, assignments and writing reports.
(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills
Evaluating the final written reports
Evaluating activities and results
e. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)
(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance
required
Not applicable
(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills
Not applicable
(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills
Not applicable
5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester Assessment
Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project, examination etc.)
Week due Proportion of Final Assessment
1
Collection of scientific information 3-4-5 20%
2
Executing the practical experiment 6-7-8-9 40%
3 Writing and submitting final report 10-11-12-13
40%
D. Student Support
1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and
academic advice. (include amount of time faculty are available each week)
400
Direct supervision by staff member over lab. Sessions.
Office hours 7 hr/ week
E Learning Resources
29. Required Text(s)
- The required textbook is determined according to the research subject by the
instructor.
2. Essential References
3- Recommended Books and Reference Material (Journals, Reports, etc) (Attach List)
The periodicals will be determined accordingly.
4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc
5- Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professional
standards/regulations
Microsoft office package
F. Facilities Required
Indicate requirements for the course including size of classrooms and laboratories (ie
number of seats in classrooms and laboratories, extent of computer access etc.)
1. Accommodation (Lecture rooms, laboratories, etc.)
Equipped laboratories.
30. Computing resources
G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes
1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching
Distribution of questionnaires for course evaluation by students.
Students- faculty meetings.
2. Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department
Peer consultation by departmental specialised committee.
Self-evaluation of the programme by the departmental studying plan
9 Processes for Improvement of Teaching
Installation of modern microscopes and digital labs
Implementation of suggestions by departmental specialised committee.
401
4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (eg. check marking by an
independent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and
remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)
Reviewing assessments by staff member/chairman/special committee when
required and instructed by higher administration at the end of each
semester.
5. Describe the planning arrangements for periodically reviewing course effectiveness
and planning for improvement.
Comparison of course with equivalent courses.
Reviewing course topics annually by the departmental specialised
committee.
Refreshment of teaching resources to ensure updating of knowledge.
Use of statistics for course evaluation by students to improve the course.